Fix the hyphenation of word phrases such as "target specific" and "machine specific".
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine-specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item How GNU properties are merged.
764
765 When linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
766 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated,
767 which are reported in the link map as
768
769 @smallexample
770 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
771 @end smallexample
772
773 It indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
774 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
775 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
776
777 @smallexample
778 Updated property 0xc0000002 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
779 @end smallexample
780
781 It indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
782 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
783 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
784 @end itemize
785
786 @cindex link map discarded
787 @kindex --print-map-discarded
788 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
789 @item --print-map-discarded
790 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
791 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
792 in the link map. Enabled by default.
793
794 @kindex -n
795 @cindex read-only text
796 @cindex NMAGIC
797 @kindex --nmagic
798 @item -n
799 @itemx --nmagic
800 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
801 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
802 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
803
804 @kindex -N
805 @kindex --omagic
806 @cindex read/write from cmd line
807 @cindex OMAGIC
808 @item -N
809 @itemx --omagic
810 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
811 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
812 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
813 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
814 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
815 specification published by Microsoft.
816
817 @kindex --no-omagic
818 @cindex OMAGIC
819 @item --no-omagic
820 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
821 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
822 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
823 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
824
825 @kindex -o @var{output}
826 @kindex --output=@var{output}
827 @cindex naming the output file
828 @item -o @var{output}
829 @itemx --output=@var{output}
830 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
831 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
832 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
833
834 @kindex -O @var{level}
835 @cindex generating optimized output
836 @item -O @var{level}
837 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
838 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
839 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
840 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
841 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
842 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
843 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
844
845 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
846 @item -plugin @var{name}
847 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
848 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
849 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
850 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
851 wish.
852
853 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
854 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
855 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
856 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
857 copied into the @file{$@{bindir@}/../lib/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
858 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
859 just copy in the newest one.
860
861 @kindex --push-state
862 @cindex push state governing input file handling
863 @item --push-state
864 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
865 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
866 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
867
868 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
869 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
870 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
871 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
872 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
873 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
874
875 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
876 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
877 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
878 something as follows:
879
880 @smallexample
881 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
882 @end smallexample
883
884 @kindex --pop-state
885 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
886 @item --pop-state
887 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
888 flags governing input file handling.
889
890 @kindex -q
891 @kindex --emit-relocs
892 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
893 @item -q
894 @itemx --emit-relocs
895 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
896 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
897 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
898 in larger executables.
899
900 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
901
902 @kindex --force-dynamic
903 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
904 @item --force-dynamic
905 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
906 to VxWorks targets.
907
908 @cindex partial link
909 @cindex relocatable output
910 @kindex -r
911 @kindex --relocatable
912 @item -r
913 @itemx --relocatable
914 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
915 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
916 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
917 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
918 @code{OMAGIC}.
919 @c ; see @option{-N}.
920 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
921 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
922 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
923
924 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
925 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
926 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
927 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
928 with input files in other formats at all.
929
930 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
931
932 @kindex -R @var{file}
933 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
934 @cindex symbol-only input
935 @item -R @var{filename}
936 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
937 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
938 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
939 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
940 programs. You may use this option more than once.
941
942 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
943 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
944 the @option{-rpath} option.
945
946 @kindex -s
947 @kindex --strip-all
948 @cindex strip all symbols
949 @item -s
950 @itemx --strip-all
951 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
952
953 @kindex -S
954 @kindex --strip-debug
955 @cindex strip debugger symbols
956 @item -S
957 @itemx --strip-debug
958 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
959
960 @kindex --strip-discarded
961 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
962 @item --strip-discarded
963 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
964 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
965 Enabled by default.
966
967 @kindex -t
968 @kindex --trace
969 @cindex input files, displaying
970 @item -t
971 @itemx --trace
972 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
973 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
974 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
975 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
976 a linker bug report.
977
978 @kindex -T @var{script}
979 @kindex --script=@var{script}
980 @cindex script files
981 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
982 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
983 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
984 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
985 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
986 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
987 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
988 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
989 options accumulate.
990
991 @kindex -dT @var{script}
992 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
993 @cindex script files
994 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
995 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
996 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
997
998 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
999 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1000 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1001 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1002 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1003 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1004 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1005 @samp{gcc}).
1006
1007 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1008 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1009 @cindex undefined symbol
1010 @item -u @var{symbol}
1011 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1012 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1013 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1014 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1015 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1016 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1017
1018 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1019 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1020 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1021 instead.
1022
1023 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1024 @cindex symbols, require defined
1025 @cindex defined symbol
1026 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1027 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1028 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1029 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1030 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1031 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1032 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1033
1034 @kindex -Ur
1035 @cindex constructors
1036 @item -Ur
1037 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1038 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1039 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1040 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1041 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1042 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1043 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1044 @samp{-r} for the others.
1045
1046 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1047 @cindex orphan sections
1048 @cindex sections, orphan
1049 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1050 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1051 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1052
1053 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1054
1055 @table @code
1056 @item place
1057 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1058 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1059 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1060
1061 @item discard
1062 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1063 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1064
1065 @item warn
1066 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1067 issue a warning.
1068
1069 @item error
1070 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1071 @end table
1072
1073 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1074
1075 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1076 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1078 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1079 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1080 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1081 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1082 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1083 in a linker script.
1084
1085 @kindex -v
1086 @kindex -V
1087 @kindex --version
1088 @cindex version
1089 @item -v
1090 @itemx --version
1091 @itemx -V
1092 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1093 lists the supported emulations.
1094
1095 @kindex -x
1096 @kindex --discard-all
1097 @cindex deleting local symbols
1098 @item -x
1099 @itemx --discard-all
1100 Delete all local symbols.
1101
1102 @kindex -X
1103 @kindex --discard-locals
1104 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1105 @item -X
1106 @itemx --discard-locals
1107 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1108 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1109 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1110
1111 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1112 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1113 @cindex symbol tracing
1114 @item -y @var{symbol}
1115 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1116 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1117 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1118 to prepend an underscore.
1119
1120 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1121 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1122
1123 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1124 @item -Y @var{path}
1125 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1126 for Solaris compatibility.
1127
1128 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1129 @item -z @var{keyword}
1130 The recognized keywords are:
1131 @table @samp
1132
1133 @item bndplt
1134 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1135
1136 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1137 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1138 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1139 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1140 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1141 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1142 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1143 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1144 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1145 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1146 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1147
1148 @item cet-report=none
1149 @itemx cet-report=warning
1150 @itemx cet-report=error
1151 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1152 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1153 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1154 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1155 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1156 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1157 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1158 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1159 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1160 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1161 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1162
1163 @item combreloc
1164 @itemx nocombreloc
1165 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1166 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1167
1168 @item common
1169 @itemx nocommon
1170 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1171 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1172
1173 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1174 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1175 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1176 using pages of this size.
1177
1178 @item defs
1179 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1180 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1181 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1182
1183 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1184 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1185 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1186 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1187 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1188 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1189 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1190 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1191 these options.
1192
1193 @item execstack
1194 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1195
1196 @item global
1197 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1198 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1199 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1200
1201 @item globalaudit
1202 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1203 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1204 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1205 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1206 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1207 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1208
1209 @item ibtplt
1210 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1211 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1212
1213 @item ibt
1214 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1215 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1216 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1217
1218 @item initfirst
1219 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1220 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1221 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1222 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1223 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1224 objects.
1225
1226 @item interpose
1227 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1228 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1229 libraries not so marked.
1230
1231 @item lazy
1232 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1233 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1234 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1235 Lazy binding is the default.
1236
1237 @item loadfltr
1238 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1239
1240 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1241 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1242
1243 @item muldefs
1244 Allow multiple definitions.
1245
1246 @item nocopyreloc
1247 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1248 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1249
1250 @item nodefaultlib
1251 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1252 should ignore any default library search paths.
1253
1254 @item nodelete
1255 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1256
1257 @item nodlopen
1258 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1259
1260 @item nodump
1261 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1262
1263 @item noexecstack
1264 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1265
1266 @item noextern-protected-data
1267 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1268 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1269 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1270 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1271 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1272 i386 and x86-64.
1273
1274 @item noreloc-overflow
1275 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1276 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1277 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1278
1279 @item now
1280 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1281 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1282 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1283 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1284 called.
1285
1286 @item origin
1287 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1288
1289 @item relro
1290 @itemx norelro
1291 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1292 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1293 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1294 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1295 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1296
1297 @item separate-code
1298 @itemx noseparate-code
1299 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1300 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1301 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1302 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1303
1304 @item shstk
1305 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1306 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1307 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1308
1309 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1310 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1311 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1312 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1313
1314 @item text
1315 @itemx notext
1316 @itemx textoff
1317 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1318 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1319 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1320
1321 @item undefs
1322 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1323 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1324 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1325
1326 @end table
1327
1328 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1329
1330 @kindex -(
1331 @cindex groups of archives
1332 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1333 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1334 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1335 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1336
1337 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1338 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1339 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1340 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1341 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1342 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1343 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1344 resolved.
1345
1346 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1347 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1348 more archives.
1349
1350 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1351 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1352 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1353 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1354 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1355 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1356 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1357 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1358 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1359 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1360 restore the old behaviour.
1361
1362 @kindex --as-needed
1363 @kindex --no-as-needed
1364 @item --as-needed
1365 @itemx --no-as-needed
1366 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1367 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1368 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1369 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1370 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1371 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1372 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1373 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1374 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1375 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1376 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1377 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1378 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1379
1380 @kindex --add-needed
1381 @kindex --no-add-needed
1382 @item --add-needed
1383 @itemx --no-add-needed
1384 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1385 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1386 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1387 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1388
1389 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1390 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1391 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1392
1393 @kindex -Bdynamic
1394 @kindex -dy
1395 @kindex -call_shared
1396 @item -Bdynamic
1397 @itemx -dy
1398 @itemx -call_shared
1399 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1400 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1401 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1402 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1403 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1404 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1405
1406 @kindex -Bgroup
1407 @item -Bgroup
1408 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1409 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1410 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1411 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1412 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1413
1414 @kindex -Bstatic
1415 @kindex -dn
1416 @kindex -non_shared
1417 @kindex -static
1418 @item -Bstatic
1419 @itemx -dn
1420 @itemx -non_shared
1421 @itemx -static
1422 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1423 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1424 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1425 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1426 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1427 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1428 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1429 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1430 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1431 libraries.
1432
1433 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1434 @item -Bsymbolic
1435 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1436 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1437 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1438 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1439 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1440 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1441 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1442 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1443
1444 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1445 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1446 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1447 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1448 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1449 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1450 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1451 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1452 libraries and position independent executables.
1453
1454 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1455 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1457 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1458 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1459 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1460 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1461 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1462 which support shared libraries.
1463
1464 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1465 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1466
1467 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1468 @item --dynamic-list-data
1469 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1470
1471 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1472 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1474 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1475
1476 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1477 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1479
1480 @kindex --check-sections
1481 @kindex --no-check-sections
1482 @item --check-sections
1483 @itemx --no-check-sections
1484 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1485 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1486 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1487 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1488 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1489 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1490 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1491 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1492 option.
1493
1494 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1495 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1496 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1497 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1498 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1499 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1500 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1501 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1502 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1503 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1504 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1505 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1506
1507 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1508 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1509 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1510 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1511 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1512 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1513 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1514 symbols.
1515
1516 @cindex cross reference table
1517 @kindex --cref
1518 @item --cref
1519 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1520 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1521 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1522
1523 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1524 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1525 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1526 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1527 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1528 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1529 symbol are listed.
1530
1531 @cindex common allocation
1532 @kindex --no-define-common
1533 @item --no-define-common
1534 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1535 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1536 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1537
1538 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1539 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1540 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1541 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1542 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1543 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1544 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1545 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1546 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1547 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1548
1549 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1550 @cindex section groups
1551 @cindex COMDAT
1552 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1553 @item --force-group-allocation
1554 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1555 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1556 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1557 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1558 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1559 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1560
1561 @cindex symbols, from command line
1562 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1563 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1564 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1565 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1566 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1567 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1568 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1569 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1570 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1571 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1572 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1573 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1574
1575 @cindex demangling, from command line
1576 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1577 @kindex --no-demangle
1578 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1579 @itemx --no-demangle
1580 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1581 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1582 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1583 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1584 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1585 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1586 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1587 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1588 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1589
1590 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1591 @kindex -I@var{file}
1592 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1593 @item -I@var{file}
1594 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1595 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1596 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1597 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1598 doing.
1599
1600 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1601 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1602 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1603 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1604 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1605 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1606
1607 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1608 @item --embedded-relocs
1609 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1610 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1611 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1612 targets.
1613
1614 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1615 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1617 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1618
1619 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1620 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1621 @item --fatal-warnings
1622 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1623 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1624 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1625
1626 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1627 @item --force-exe-suffix
1628 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1629
1630 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1631 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1632 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1633 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1634 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1635 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1636
1637 @kindex --gc-sections
1638 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1639 @cindex garbage collection
1640 @item --gc-sections
1641 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1642 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1643 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1644 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1645 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1646 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1647 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1648
1649 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1650 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1651 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1652 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1653 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1654 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1655 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1656 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1657 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1658 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1659
1660 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1661 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1662 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1663 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1664 command in the linker script.
1665
1666 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1667 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1668 @cindex garbage collection
1669 @item --print-gc-sections
1670 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1671 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1672 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1673 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1674 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1675 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1676 line.
1677
1678 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1679 @cindex garbage collection
1680 @item --gc-keep-exported
1681 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1682 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1683 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1684 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1685 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1686 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1687 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1688 ELF format targets.
1689
1690 @kindex --print-output-format
1691 @cindex output format
1692 @item --print-output-format
1693 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1694 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1695 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1696
1697 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1698 @cindex memory usage
1699 @item --print-memory-usage
1700 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1701 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1702 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1703 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1704 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1705
1706 @smallexample
1707 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1708 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1709 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1710 @end smallexample
1711
1712 @cindex help
1713 @cindex usage
1714 @kindex --help
1715 @item --help
1716 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1717
1718 @kindex --target-help
1719 @item --target-help
1720 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1721
1722 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1723 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1724 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1725 @option{-M} option, above.
1726
1727 @cindex memory usage
1728 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1729 @item --no-keep-memory
1730 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1731 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1732 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1733 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1734 while linking a large executable.
1735
1736 @kindex --no-undefined
1737 @kindex -z defs
1738 @kindex -z undefs
1739 @item --no-undefined
1740 @itemx -z defs
1741 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1742 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1743 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1744 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1745 libraries being linked in.
1746
1747 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1748
1749 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1750 @kindex -z muldefs
1751 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1752 @itemx -z muldefs
1753 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1754 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1755 first definition will be used.
1756
1757 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1758 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1759 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1760 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1761 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1762 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1763 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1764 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1765 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1766
1767 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1768 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1769 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1770 a shared library.
1771
1772 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1773 libraries specified at link time are that:
1774
1775 @itemize @bullet
1776 @item
1777 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1778 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1779 resolvable at load time.
1780 @item
1781 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1782 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1783
1784 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1785 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1786 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1787 appropriate memset function.
1788 @end itemize
1789
1790 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1791 @item --no-undefined-version
1792 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1793 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1794 will be issued instead.
1795
1796 @kindex --default-symver
1797 @item --default-symver
1798 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799 exported symbols.
1800
1801 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1802 @item --default-imported-symver
1803 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1804 imported symbols.
1805
1806 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1807 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1808 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1809 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1810 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1811 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1812 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1813 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1814 inappropriate.
1815
1816 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1817 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1819 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1820
1821 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1822 @item --no-whole-archive
1823 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1824 archive files.
1825
1826 @cindex output file after errors
1827 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1828 @item --noinhibit-exec
1829 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1830 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1831 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1832 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1833
1834 @kindex -nostdlib
1835 @item -nostdlib
1836 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1837 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1838 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1839
1840 @ifclear SingleFormat
1841 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1842 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1843 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1844 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1845 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1846 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1847 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1848 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1849 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1850 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1851 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1852 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1853 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1854 @end ifclear
1855
1856 @kindex --out-implib
1857 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1858 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1859 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1860 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1861 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1862 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1863 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1864 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1865
1866 @kindex -pie
1867 @kindex --pic-executable
1868 @item -pie
1869 @itemx --pic-executable
1870 @cindex position independent executables
1871 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1872 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1873 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1874 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1875 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1876 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1877
1878 @kindex -qmagic
1879 @item -qmagic
1880 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1881
1882 @kindex -Qy
1883 @item -Qy
1884 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1885
1886 @kindex --relax
1887 @cindex synthesizing linker
1888 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1889 @cindex --no-relax
1890 @item --relax
1891 @itemx --no-relax
1892 An option with machine dependent effects.
1893 @ifset GENERIC
1894 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1895 @end ifset
1896 @ifset H8300
1897 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1898 @end ifset
1899 @ifset XTENSA
1900 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1901 @end ifset
1902 @ifset M68HC11
1903 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1904 @end ifset
1905 @ifset NIOSII
1906 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1907 @end ifset
1908 @ifset POWERPC
1909 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1910 @end ifset
1911
1912 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1913 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1914 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1915 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1916 instructions, and combining constant values.
1917
1918 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1919 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1922 family of processors.
1923 @end ifset
1924
1925 @ifset GENERIC
1926 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1927 but ignored.
1928 @end ifset
1929
1930 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1931 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1932
1933 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1934 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1935 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1936 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1937 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1938 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1939 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1940 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1941 @ifset GENERIC
1942 (such as VxWorks)
1943 @end ifset
1944 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1945 run-time memory.
1946
1947 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1948 or symbols needed for relocations.
1949
1950 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1951 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1952
1953 @ifset GENERIC
1954 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1955 @cindex runtime library search path
1956 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1957 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1958 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1959 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1960 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1961 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1962 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1963 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1964 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1965 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1966
1967 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1968 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1969 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1973 file systems.
1974
1975 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1976 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1977 the @option{-rpath} option.
1978 @end ifset
1979
1980 @ifset GENERIC
1981 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1982 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986 of the input files.
1987
1988 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1991 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1992 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1993 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1994 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995 appearing multiple times.
1996
1997 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2001 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005 supported.
2006
2007 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010 runtime linker would do.
2011
2012 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2013 libraries:
2014 @enumerate
2015 @item
2016 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2017 @item
2018 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2022 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2025 @item
2026 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2029 @item
2030 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2032 @item
2033 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2034 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2035 @item
2036 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040 @item
2041 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042 @item
2043 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045 @end enumerate
2046
2047 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048 warning and continue with the link.
2049 @end ifset
2050
2051 @kindex -shared
2052 @kindex -Bshareable
2053 @item -shared
2054 @itemx -Bshareable
2055 @cindex shared libraries
2056 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2058 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2059 undefined symbols in the link.
2060
2061 @kindex --sort-common
2062 @item --sort-common
2063 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2065 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2071
2072 @kindex --sort-section=name
2073 @item --sort-section=name
2074 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075 patterns in the linker script.
2076
2077 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078 @item --sort-section=alignment
2079 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080 patterns in the linker script.
2081
2082 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
2088 @kindex --split-by-file
2089 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2090 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2091 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092 size of 1 if not given.
2093
2094 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2095 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2096 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2097 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2098 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2099 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2105 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2106
2107 @kindex --stats
2108 @item --stats
2109 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110 as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2112 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2113 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
2118 @kindex --task-link
2119 @item --task-link
2120 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
2123 @kindex --traditional-format
2124 @cindex traditional format
2125 @item --traditional-format
2126 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2128 use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130 @cindex dbx
2131 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2132 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2135 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2136 combine duplicate entries.
2137
2138 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143 line.
2144 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2150 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2153 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2154 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2158 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2159
2160 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2163 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164 byte of the text segment.
2165
2166 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
2173 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
2179 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182 values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184 @table @samp
2185 @item ignore-all
2186 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2187
2188 @item report-all
2189 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2190
2191 @item ignore-in-object-files
2192 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200 command line.
2201 @end table
2202
2203 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208 can change this to a warning.
2209
2210 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212 @item --dll-verbose
2213 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2214 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2215 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2216 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2218
2219 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2221 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2222 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2224 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2225 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229 @xref{WIN32}.
2230
2231 @kindex --warn-common
2232 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234 @item --warn-common
2235 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2236 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2237 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2239 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2240 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244 @table @samp
2245 @item int i = 1;
2246 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247 file.
2248
2249 @item extern int i;
2250 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252 variable somewhere.
2253
2254 @item int i;
2255 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260 a definition of the same variable.
2261 @end table
2262
2263 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267 a common symbol.
2268
2269 @enumerate
2270 @item
2271 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272 definition for the symbol.
2273 @smallexample
2274 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277 @end smallexample
2278
2279 @item
2280 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283 @smallexample
2284 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287 @end smallexample
2288
2289 @item
2290 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291 @smallexample
2292 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 @item
2298 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299 @smallexample
2300 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303 @end smallexample
2304
2305 @item
2306 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308 encountered in a different order.
2309 @smallexample
2310 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313 @end smallexample
2314 @end enumerate
2315
2316 @kindex --warn-constructors
2317 @item --warn-constructors
2318 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320 detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2324 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336 @kindex --warn-once
2337 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339 @item --warn-once
2340 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341 which refers to it.
2342
2343 @kindex --warn-section-align
2344 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346 @item --warn-section-align
2347 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
2353 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2355 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2356
2357 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358 @item --warn-alternate-em
2359 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
2361 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
2372 @kindex --whole-archive
2373 @cindex including an entire archive
2374 @item --whole-archive
2375 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2376 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2377 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380 library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
2382 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2383 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2385 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2388 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393 @var{symbol}.
2394
2395 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400 Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402 @smallexample
2403 void *
2404 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2405 @{
2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408 @}
2409 @end smallexample
2410
2411 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2412 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2417 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2418 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
2422 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427 @smallexample
2428 int
2429 f (void)
2430 @{
2431 return 123;
2432 @}
2433
2434 int
2435 g (void)
2436 @{
2437 return f();
2438 @}
2439 @end smallexample
2440
2441 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2442 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2443 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2444 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2445 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2446 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2447 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2448
2449 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2450 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2451 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2452 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2453 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2454
2455 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2456 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2457 @item --enable-new-dtags
2458 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2459 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2460 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2461 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2462 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2463 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2464 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2465 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2466
2467 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2468 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2469 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2470 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2471 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2472 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2473 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2474
2475 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2476 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2477 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2478 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2479 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2480 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2481 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2482 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2483
2484 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2485 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2486 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2487 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2488 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2489 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2490 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2491 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2492 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2493 compressed using zlib.
2494
2495 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2496 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2497 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2498 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2499 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2500 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2501
2502 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2503 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2504
2505 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2506 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2507 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2508 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2509
2510 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2511 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2512 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2513 @option{--help} option.
2514
2515 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2516 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2517 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2518 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2519 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2520 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2521
2522 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2523 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2524 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2525 has been used.
2526
2527 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2528 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2529
2530 @kindex --build-id
2531 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2532 @item --build-id
2533 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2534 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2535 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2536 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2537 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2538 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2539 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2540 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2541 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2542 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2543 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2544
2545 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2546 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2547 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2548 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2549 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2550 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2551
2552 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2553 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2554 @end table
2555
2556 @c man end
2557
2558 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2559
2560 @c man begin OPTIONS
2561
2562 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2563 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2564 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2565 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2566 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2567 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2568 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2569 object file).
2570
2571 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2572 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2573 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2574 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2575
2576 @table @gcctabopt
2577
2578 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2579 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2580 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2581 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @kindex --base-file
2585 @item --base-file @var{file}
2586 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2587 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2588 @file{dlltool}.
2589 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2590
2591 @kindex --dll
2592 @item --dll
2593 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2594 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2595 file.
2596 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2597
2598 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2599 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2600 @item --enable-long-section-names
2601 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2602 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2603 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2604 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2605 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2606 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2607 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2608 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2609 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2610 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2611 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2612 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2613 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2614 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2615 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2616 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2617 image and not stripping symbols.
2618 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2619
2620 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2621 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2622 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2623 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2624 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2625 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2626 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2627 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2628 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2629 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2630 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2631 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2632 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2633 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2634 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2635 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2636 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @kindex --leading-underscore
2640 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2641 @item --leading-underscore
2642 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2643 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2644 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2645 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2646
2647 @cindex DLLs, creating
2648 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2649 @item --export-all-symbols
2650 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2651 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2652 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2653 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2654 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2655 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2656 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2657 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2658 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2659 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2660 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2661 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2662 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2663 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2664 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2665 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2666 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2667 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2668 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2669 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2670 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2671 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2675 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2676 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2677 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2681 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2682 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --file-alignment
2686 @item --file-alignment
2687 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2688 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2689 512.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2691
2692 @cindex heap size
2693 @kindex --heap
2694 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2695 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2696 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2697 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2698 committed.
2699 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2700
2701 @cindex image base
2702 @kindex --image-base
2703 @item --image-base @var{value}
2704 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2705 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2706 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2707 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2708 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2709 for dlls.
2710 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2711
2712 @kindex --kill-at
2713 @item --kill-at
2714 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2715 symbols before they are exported.
2716 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2717
2718 @kindex --large-address-aware
2719 @item --large-address-aware
2720 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2721 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2722 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2723 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2724 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2725 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2728 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2729 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2730 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2731 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2732 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2733 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2734
2735 @kindex --major-image-version
2736 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2737 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740 @kindex --major-os-version
2741 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2742 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2746 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2747 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2748 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2749
2750 @kindex --minor-image-version
2751 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2752 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2753 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755 @kindex --minor-os-version
2756 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2757 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2758 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2759
2760 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2761 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2762 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2763 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2764
2765 @cindex DEF files, creating
2766 @cindex DLLs, creating
2767 @kindex --output-def
2768 @item --output-def @var{file}
2769 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2770 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2771 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2772 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2773 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2774 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2775
2776 @cindex DLLs, creating
2777 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2778 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2779 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2780 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2781 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2782 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2783 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2784 execution are avoided.
2785 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2786
2787 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2788 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2789 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2790 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2791 default.
2792 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2793
2794 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2795 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2796 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2797 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2798 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2799 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2800 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2801 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2802 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2803 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2804
2805 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2806 @item --enable-auto-import
2807 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2808 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2809 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2810 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2811
2812 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2813 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2814
2815 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2816 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2817 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2818
2819 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2820 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2821 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2822 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2823 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2824
2825 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2826 see this message:
2827
2828 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2829 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2830
2831 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2832 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2833 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2834 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2835 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2836 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2837 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2838 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2839 the warning, and exit.
2840
2841 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2842 data type of the exported variable:
2843
2844 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2845 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2846 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2847
2848 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2849 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2850 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2851 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2852
2853 @example
2854 extern type extern_array[];
2855 extern_array[1] -->
2856 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2857 @end example
2858
2859 or
2860
2861 @example
2862 extern type extern_array[];
2863 extern_array[1] -->
2864 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2865 @end example
2866
2867 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2868 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2869
2870 @example
2871 extern struct s extern_struct;
2872 extern_struct.field -->
2873 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2874 @end example
2875
2876 or
2877
2878 @example
2879 extern long long extern_ll;
2880 extern_ll -->
2881 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2882 @end example
2883
2884 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2885 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2886 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2887 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2888 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2889 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2890 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2891 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2892
2893 Original:
2894 @example
2895 --foo.h
2896 extern int arr[];
2897 --foo.c
2898 #include "foo.h"
2899 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2900 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2901 @}
2902 @end example
2903
2904 Solution 1:
2905 @example
2906 --foo.h
2907 extern int arr[];
2908 --foo.c
2909 #include "foo.h"
2910 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2912 volatile int *parr = arr;
2913 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2914 @}
2915 @end example
2916
2917 Solution 2:
2918 @example
2919 --foo.h
2920 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2921 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2922 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2923 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2924 #else
2925 #define FOO_IMPORT
2926 #endif
2927 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2928 --foo.c
2929 #include "foo.h"
2930 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2931 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2932 @}
2933 @end example
2934
2935 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2936 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2937 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2938 functions).
2939
2940 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2941 @item --disable-auto-import
2942 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2943 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2944 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2945
2946 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2947 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2949 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2950 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2951 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2952 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2953
2954 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2955 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2956 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2957 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2958
2959 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2960 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2962 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2963
2964 @kindex --section-alignment
2965 @item --section-alignment
2966 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2967 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2968 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2969
2970 @cindex stack size
2971 @kindex --stack
2972 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2973 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2974 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2975 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2976 committed.
2977 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2978
2979 @kindex --subsystem
2980 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2981 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2982 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2983 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2984 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2985 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2986 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2987 @var{which}.
2988 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2989
2990 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2991 of the PE file header:
2992 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2993
2994 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2995 @item --high-entropy-va
2996 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2997 (ASLR).
2998
2999 @kindex --dynamicbase
3000 @item --dynamicbase
3001 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3002 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3003 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3004
3005 @kindex --forceinteg
3006 @item --forceinteg
3007 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3008
3009 @kindex --nxcompat
3010 @item --nxcompat
3011 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3012 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3013
3014 @kindex --no-isolation
3015 @item --no-isolation
3016 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3017
3018 @kindex --no-seh
3019 @item --no-seh
3020 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3021 this image.
3022
3023 @kindex --no-bind
3024 @item --no-bind
3025 Do not bind this image.
3026
3027 @kindex --wdmdriver
3028 @item --wdmdriver
3029 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3030
3031 @kindex --tsaware
3032 @item --tsaware
3033 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3034
3035 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3036 @item --insert-timestamp
3037 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3038 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3039 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3040 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3041 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3042 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3043 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3044 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3045 identically.
3046 @end table
3047
3048 @c man end
3049
3050 @ifset C6X
3051 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3052
3053 @c man begin OPTIONS
3054
3055 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3056 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3057 all executables use an index of 0.
3058
3059 @table @gcctabopt
3060
3061 @kindex --dsbt-size
3062 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3063 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3064 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3065 entries.
3066
3067 @kindex --dsbt-index
3068 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3069 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3070 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3071 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3072 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3073
3074 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3075 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3076 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3077
3078 @end table
3079
3080 @c man end
3081 @end ifset
3082
3083 @ifset CSKY
3084 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3085
3086 @c man begin OPTIONS
3087
3088 @table @gcctabopt
3089
3090 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3091 @item --branch-stub
3092 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3093 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3094 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3095 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3096 the compiler or assembler.
3097
3098 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3099 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3100 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3101 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3102 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3103 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3104 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3105 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3106 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3107
3108 @end table
3109
3110 @c man end
3111 @end ifset
3112
3113 @ifset M68HC11
3114 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3115
3116 @c man begin OPTIONS
3117
3118 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3119 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3120
3121 @table @gcctabopt
3122
3123 @kindex --no-trampoline
3124 @item --no-trampoline
3125 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3126 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3127 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3128
3129 @kindex --bank-window
3130 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3131 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3132 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3133 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3134 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3135
3136 @end table
3137
3138 @c man end
3139 @end ifset
3140
3141 @ifset M68K
3142 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3143
3144 @c man begin OPTIONS
3145
3146 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3147 when linking for 68K targets.
3148
3149 @table @gcctabopt
3150
3151 @kindex --got
3152 @item --got=@var{type}
3153 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3154 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3155 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3156 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3157
3158 @end table
3159
3160 @c man end
3161 @end ifset
3162
3163 @ifset MIPS
3164 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3165
3166 @c man begin OPTIONS
3167
3168 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3169 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3170 linking for MIPS targets.
3171
3172 @table @gcctabopt
3173
3174 @kindex --insn32
3175 @item --insn32
3176 @kindex --no-insn32
3177 @itemx --no-insn32
3178 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3179 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3180 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3181 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3182 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3183 possible.
3184
3185 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3186 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3187 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3188 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3190 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3191 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3192 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3193 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3194 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3195 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3196 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3197 an error.
3198
3199 @end table
3200
3201 @c man end
3202 @end ifset
3203
3204 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3205 @node Environment
3206 @section Environment Variables
3207
3208 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3209
3210 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3211 @ifclear SingleFormat
3212 @code{GNUTARGET},
3213 @end ifclear
3214 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3215
3216 @ifclear SingleFormat
3217 @kindex GNUTARGET
3218 @cindex default input format
3219 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3220 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3221 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3222 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3223 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3224 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3225 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3226 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3227 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3228 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3229 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3230 @end ifclear
3231
3232 @kindex LDEMULATION
3233 @cindex default emulation
3234 @cindex emulation, default
3235 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3236 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3237 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3238 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3239 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3240 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3241 linker was configured.
3242
3243 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3244 @cindex demangling, default
3245 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3246 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3247 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3248 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3249 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3250 options.
3251
3252 @c man end
3253 @end ifset
3254
3255 @node Scripts
3256 @chapter Linker Scripts
3257
3258 @cindex scripts
3259 @cindex linker scripts
3260 @cindex command files
3261 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3262 written in the linker command language.
3263
3264 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3265 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3266 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3267 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3268 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3269 described below.
3270
3271 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3272 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3273 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3274 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3275 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3276
3277 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3278 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3279 default linker script.
3280
3281 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3282 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3283 Linker Scripts}.
3284
3285 @menu
3286 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3287 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3288 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3289 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3290 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3291 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3292 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3293 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3294 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3295 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3296 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3297 @end menu
3298
3299 @node Basic Script Concepts
3300 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3301 @cindex linker script concepts
3302 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3303 describe the linker script language.
3304
3305 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3306 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3307 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3308 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3309 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3310 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3311 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3312 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3313
3314 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3315 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3316 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3317 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3318 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3319 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3320 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3321 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3322 of debugging information.
3323
3324 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3325 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3326 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3327 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3328 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3329 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3330 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3331 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3332 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3333 RAM address would be the VMA.
3334
3335 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3336 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3337
3338 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3339 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3340 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3341 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3342 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3343 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3344 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3345
3346 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3347 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3348 option.
3349
3350 @node Script Format
3351 @section Linker Script Format
3352 @cindex linker script format
3353 Linker scripts are text files.
3354
3355 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3356 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3357 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3358 generally ignored.
3359
3360 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3361 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3362 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3363 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3364 file name.
3365
3366 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3367 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3368 to whitespace.
3369
3370 @node Simple Example
3371 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3372 @cindex linker script example
3373 @cindex example of linker script
3374 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3375
3376 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3377 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3378 memory layout of the output file.
3379
3380 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3381 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3382 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3383 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3384 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3385 your input files.
3386
3387 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3388 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3389 linker script which will do that:
3390 @smallexample
3391 SECTIONS
3392 @{
3393 . = 0x10000;
3394 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3395 . = 0x8000000;
3396 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3397 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3398 @}
3399 @end smallexample
3400
3401 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3402 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3403 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3404
3405 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3406 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3407 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3408 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3409 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3410 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3411 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3412
3413 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3414 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3415 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3416 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3417 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3418 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3419
3420 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3421 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3422 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3423
3424 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3425 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3426 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3427 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3428 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3429 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3430 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3431
3432 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3433 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3434 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3435 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3436 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3437 sections.
3438
3439 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3440
3441 @node Simple Commands
3442 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3443 @cindex linker script simple commands
3444 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3445
3446 @menu
3447 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3448 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3449 @ifclear SingleFormat
3450 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3451 @end ifclear
3452
3453 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3454 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3455 @end menu
3456
3457 @node Entry Point
3458 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3459 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3460 @cindex start of execution
3461 @cindex first instruction
3462 @cindex entry point
3463 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3464 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3465 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3466 @smallexample
3467 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3468 @end smallexample
3469
3470 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3471 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3472 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3473 @itemize @bullet
3474 @item
3475 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3476 @item
3477 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3478 @item
3479 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3480 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3481 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3482 @item
3483 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3484 @item
3485 The address @code{0}.
3486 @end itemize
3487
3488 @node File Commands
3489 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3490 @cindex linker script file commands
3491 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3492
3493 @table @code
3494 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3495 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3496 @cindex including a linker script
3497 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3498 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3499 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3500 10 levels deep.
3501
3502 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3503 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3504
3505 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3506 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3507 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3508 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3509 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3510 @cindex linker script input object files
3511 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3512 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3513
3514 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3515 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3516 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3517
3518 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3519 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3520
3521 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3522 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3523 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3524 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3525 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3526 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3527 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3528 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3529 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3530 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3531
3532 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3533 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3534 @samp{-l}.
3535
3536 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3537 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3538 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3539
3540 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3541 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3542 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3543 @cindex grouping input files
3544 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3545 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3546 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3547 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3548
3549 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3550 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3551 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3552 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3553 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3554 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3555 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3556 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3557 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3558 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3559 setting afterwards.
3560
3561 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3562 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3563 @cindex output file name in linker script
3564 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3565 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3566 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3567 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3568 precedence.
3569
3570 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3571 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3572
3573 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3574 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3575 @cindex library search path in linker script
3576 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3577 @cindex search path in linker script
3578 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3579 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3580 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3581 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3582 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3583 the command-line option are searched first.
3584
3585 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3586 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3587 @cindex first input file
3588 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3589 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3590 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3591 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3592 first file.
3593 @end table
3594
3595 @ifclear SingleFormat
3596 @node Format Commands
3597 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3598 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3599
3600 @table @code
3601 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3602 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3603 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3604 @cindex output file format in linker script
3605 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3606 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3607 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3608 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3609 line option takes precedence.
3610
3611 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3612 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3613 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3614 desired endianness.
3615
3616 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3617 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3618 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3619 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3620
3621 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3622 command:
3623 @smallexample
3624 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3625 @end smallexample
3626 This says that the default format for the output file is
3627 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3628 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3629 format.
3630
3631 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3632 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3633 @cindex input file format in linker script
3634 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3635 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3636 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3637 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3638 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3639 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3640 @end table
3641 @end ifclear
3642
3643 @node REGION_ALIAS
3644 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3645 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3646 @cindex region alias
3647 @cindex region names
3648
3649 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3650 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3651
3652 @smallexample
3653 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3654 @end smallexample
3655
3656 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3657 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3658 to memory regions. An example follows.
3659
3660 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3661 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3662 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3663 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3664 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3665 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3666 sections:
3667
3668 @itemize @bullet
3669 @item
3670 @code{.text} program code;
3671 @item
3672 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3673 @item
3674 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3675 @item
3676 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3677 @end itemize
3678
3679 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3680 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3681 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3682 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3683 @code{C}:
3684 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3685 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3686 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3687 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3688 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3689 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3690 @end multitable
3691 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3692 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3693 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3694 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3695
3696 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3697 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3698 memory layout:
3699 @smallexample
3700 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3701
3702 SECTIONS
3703 @{
3704 .text :
3705 @{
3706 *(.text)
3707 @} > REGION_TEXT
3708 .rodata :
3709 @{
3710 *(.rodata)
3711 rodata_end = .;
3712 @} > REGION_RODATA
3713 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3714 @{
3715 data_start = .;
3716 *(.data)
3717 @} > REGION_DATA
3718 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3719 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3720 .bss :
3721 @{
3722 *(.bss)
3723 @} > REGION_BSS
3724 @}
3725 @end smallexample
3726
3727 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3728 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3729 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3730 @table @code
3731 @item A
3732 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3733 @smallexample
3734 MEMORY
3735 @{
3736 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3737 @}
3738
3739 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3740 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3741 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3742 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3743 @end smallexample
3744 @item B
3745 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3746 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3747 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3748 @smallexample
3749 MEMORY
3750 @{
3751 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3752 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3753 @}
3754
3755 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3756 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3757 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3758 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3759 @end smallexample
3760 @item C
3761 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3762 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3763 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3764 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3765 @smallexample
3766 MEMORY
3767 @{
3768 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3769 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3770 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3771 @}
3772
3773 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3774 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3775 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3776 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3777 @end smallexample
3778 @end table
3779
3780 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3781 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3782 necessary:
3783 @smallexample
3784 #include <string.h>
3785
3786 extern char data_start [];
3787 extern char data_size [];
3788 extern char data_load_start [];
3789
3790 void copy_data(void)
3791 @{
3792 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3793 @{
3794 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3795 @}
3796 @}
3797 @end smallexample
3798
3799 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3800 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3801 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3802
3803 @table @code
3804 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3805 @kindex ASSERT
3806 @cindex assertion in linker script
3807 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3808 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3809
3810 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3811 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3812 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3813 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3814 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3815
3816 @smallexample
3817 .stack :
3818 @{
3819 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3820 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3821 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3822 @}
3823 @end smallexample
3824
3825 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3826 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3827 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3828
3829 @smallexample
3830 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3831 .stack :
3832 @{
3833 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3834 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3835 @}
3836 @end smallexample
3837
3838 will work.
3839
3840 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3841 @kindex EXTERN
3842 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3843 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3844 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3845 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3846 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3847 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3848
3849 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3850 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3851 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3852 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3853 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3854 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3855
3856 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3857 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3859 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3860 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3861 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3862
3863 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3864 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3865 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3866 @cindex section groups
3867 @cindex COMDAT
3868 This command has the same effect as the
3869 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3870 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3871 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3872 specified (@samp{-r}).
3873
3874 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3875 @kindex INSERT
3876 @cindex insert user script into default script
3877 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3878 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3879 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3880 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3881 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3882 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3883 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3884 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3885 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3886 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3887 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3888 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3889 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3890
3891 @smallexample
3892 SECTIONS
3893 @{
3894 OVERLAY :
3895 @{
3896 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3897 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3898 @}
3899 @}
3900 INSERT AFTER .text;
3901 @end smallexample
3902
3903 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3904 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3905 @cindex cross references
3906 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3907 references among certain output sections.
3908
3909 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3910 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3911 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3912 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3913 a function defined in the other section.
3914
3915 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3916 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3917 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3918 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3919 names.
3920
3921 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3922 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3923 @cindex cross references
3924 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3925 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3926
3927 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3928 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3929 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3930 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3931 must never call back.
3932
3933 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3934 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3935 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3936 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3937 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3938 names, not input section names.
3939
3940 @ifclear SingleFormat
3941 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3942 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3943 @cindex machine architecture
3944 @cindex architecture
3945 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3946 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3947 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3948 the @samp{-f} option.
3949 @end ifclear
3950
3951 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3952 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3953 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3954 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3955 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3956 @xref{Expression Section}.
3957 @end table
3958
3959 @node Assignments
3960 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3961 @cindex assignment in scripts
3962 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3963 @cindex variables, defining
3964 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3965 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3966
3967 @menu
3968 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3969 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3970 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3971 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3972 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3973 @end menu
3974
3975 @node Simple Assignments
3976 @subsection Simple Assignments
3977
3978 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3979
3980 @table @code
3981 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3982 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3983 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3984 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3985 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3986 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3987 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3988 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3989 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3990 @end table
3991
3992 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3993 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3994 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3995
3996 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3997 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3998
3999 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4000
4001 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4002
4003 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4004 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4005 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4006
4007 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4008 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4009
4010 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4011 assignments may be used:
4012
4013 @smallexample
4014 floating_point = 0;
4015 SECTIONS
4016 @{
4017 .text :
4018 @{
4019 *(.text)
4020 _etext = .;
4021 @}
4022 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4023 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4024 @}
4025 @end smallexample
4026 @noindent
4027 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4028 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4029 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4030 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4031 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4032
4033 @node HIDDEN
4034 @subsection HIDDEN
4035 @cindex HIDDEN
4036 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4037 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4038
4039 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4040 @code{HIDDEN}:
4041
4042 @smallexample
4043 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4044 SECTIONS
4045 @{
4046 .text :
4047 @{
4048 *(.text)
4049 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4050 @}
4051 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4052 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4053 @}
4054 @end smallexample
4055 @noindent
4056 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4057
4058 @node PROVIDE
4059 @subsection PROVIDE
4060 @cindex PROVIDE
4061 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4062 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4063 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4064 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4065 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4066 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4067 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4068 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4069
4070 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4071 @smallexample
4072 SECTIONS
4073 @{
4074 .text :
4075 @{
4076 *(.text)
4077 _etext = .;
4078 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4079 @}
4080 @}
4081 @end smallexample
4082
4083 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4084 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4085 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4086 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4087 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4088 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4089
4090 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4091 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4092 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4093 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4094 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4095
4096 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4097 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4098 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4099 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4100 hidden and won't be exported.
4101
4102 @node Source Code Reference
4103 @subsection Source Code Reference
4104
4105 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4106 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4107 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4108 symbol that does not have a value.
4109
4110 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4111 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4112 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4113 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4114 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4115 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4116 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4117 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4118
4119 @smallexample
4120 extern int foo;
4121 @end smallexample
4122
4123 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4124
4125 @smallexample
4126 _foo = 1000;
4127 @end smallexample
4128
4129 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4130 transformation has taken place.
4131
4132 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4133 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4134 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4135 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4136 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4137 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4138 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4139
4140 @smallexample
4141 int foo = 1000;
4142 @end smallexample
4143
4144 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4145 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4146 number 1000 is initially stored.
4147
4148 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4149 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4150 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4151 So:
4152
4153 @smallexample
4154 foo = 1;
4155 @end smallexample
4156
4157 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4158 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4159 address. Whereas:
4160
4161 @smallexample
4162 int * a = & foo;
4163 @end smallexample
4164
4165 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4166 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4167 the variable @samp{a}.
4168
4169 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4170 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4171 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4172
4173 @smallexample
4174 foo = 1000;
4175 @end smallexample
4176
4177 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4178 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4179 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4180 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4181 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4182
4183 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4184 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4185 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4186 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4187 linker script contains these declarations:
4188
4189 @smallexample
4190 @group
4191 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4192 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4193 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4194 @end group
4195 @end smallexample
4196
4197 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4198
4199 @smallexample
4200 @group
4201 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4202
4203 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4204 @end group
4205 @end smallexample
4206
4207 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4208 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4209 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4210
4211 @smallexample
4212 @group
4213 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4214
4215 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4216 @end group
4217 @end smallexample
4218
4219 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4220 operators.
4221
4222 @node SECTIONS
4223 @section SECTIONS Command
4224 @kindex SECTIONS
4225 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4226 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4227
4228 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4229 @smallexample
4230 SECTIONS
4231 @{
4232 @var{sections-command}
4233 @var{sections-command}
4234 @dots{}
4235 @}
4236 @end smallexample
4237
4238 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4239
4240 @itemize @bullet
4241 @item
4242 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4243 @item
4244 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4245 @item
4246 an output section description
4247 @item
4248 an overlay description
4249 @end itemize
4250
4251 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4252 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4253 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4254 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4255 the layout of the output file.
4256
4257 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4258 below.
4259
4260 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4261 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4262 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4263 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4264 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4265 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4266
4267 @menu
4268 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4269 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4270 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4271 * Input Section:: Input section description
4272 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4273 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4274 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4275 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4276 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4277 @end menu
4278
4279 @node Output Section Description
4280 @subsection Output Section Description
4281 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4282 @smallexample
4283 @group
4284 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4285 [AT(@var{lma})]
4286 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4287 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4288 [@var{constraint}]
4289 @{
4290 @var{output-section-command}
4291 @var{output-section-command}
4292 @dots{}
4293 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4294 @end group
4295 @end smallexample
4296
4297 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4298
4299 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4300 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4301 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4302 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4303 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4304
4305 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4306
4307 @itemize @bullet
4308 @item
4309 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4310 @item
4311 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4312 @item
4313 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4314 @item
4315 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4316 @end itemize
4317
4318 @node Output Section Name
4319 @subsection Output Section Name
4320 @cindex name, section
4321 @cindex section name
4322 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4323 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4324 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4325 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4326 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4327 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4328 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4329 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4330 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4331 commas must be quoted.
4332
4333 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4334 Discarding}.
4335
4336 @node Output Section Address
4337 @subsection Output Section Address
4338 @cindex address, section
4339 @cindex section address
4340 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4341 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4342 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4343
4344 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4345 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4346 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4347 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4348 contained within the output section.
4349
4350 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4351
4352 @itemize @bullet
4353 @item
4354 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4355 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4356 in that region.
4357
4358 @item
4359 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4360 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4361 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4362 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4363
4364 @item
4365 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4366 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4367 counter.
4368 @end itemize
4369
4370 @noindent
4371 For example:
4372
4373 @smallexample
4374 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4375 @end smallexample
4376
4377 @noindent
4378 and
4379
4380 @smallexample
4381 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4382 @end smallexample
4383
4384 @noindent
4385 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4386 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4387 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4388 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4389 input sections.
4390
4391 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4392 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4393 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4394 do something like this:
4395 @smallexample
4396 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4397 @end smallexample
4398 @noindent
4399 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4400 aligned upward to the specified value.
4401
4402 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4403 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4404 sections are ignored).
4405
4406 @node Input Section
4407 @subsection Input Section Description
4408 @cindex input sections
4409 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4410 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4411
4412 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4413 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4414 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4415 map the input files into your memory layout.
4416
4417 @menu
4418 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4419 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4420 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4421 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4422 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4423 @end menu
4424
4425 @node Input Section Basics
4426 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4427 @cindex input section basics
4428 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4429 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4430
4431 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4432 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4433
4434 The most common input section description is to include all input
4435 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4436 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4437 @smallexample
4438 *(.text)
4439 @end smallexample
4440 @noindent
4441 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4442 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4443 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4444 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4445 example:
4446 @smallexample
4447 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4448 @end smallexample
4449 @noindent
4450 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4451 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4452 placed inside the section list, for example:
4453 @smallexample
4454 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4455 @end smallexample
4456 @noindent
4457 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4458 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4459 more than one section, as described below.
4460
4461 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4462 @smallexample
4463 *(.text .rdata)
4464 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4465 @end smallexample
4466 @noindent
4467 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4468 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4469 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4470 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4471 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4472 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4473
4474 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4475 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4476 immediately following section, for example:
4477 @smallexample
4478 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4479 @end smallexample
4480 @noindent
4481 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4482 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4483 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4484 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4485 could be modified to:
4486 @smallexample
4487 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4488 @end smallexample
4489 @noindent
4490 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4491 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4492 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4493 @smallexample
4494 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4495 @end smallexample
4496
4497 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4498 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4499 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4500 @smallexample
4501 data.o(.data)
4502 @end smallexample
4503
4504 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4505 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4506
4507 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4508
4509 @smallexample
4510 @group
4511 SECTIONS @{
4512 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4513 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4514 @}
4515 @end group
4516 @end smallexample
4517
4518 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4519 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4520 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4521 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4522 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4523
4524 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4525 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4526 with no whitespace around the colon.
4527
4528 @table @samp
4529 @item archive:file
4530 matches file within archive
4531 @item archive:
4532 matches the whole archive
4533 @item :file
4534 matches file but not one in an archive
4535 @end table
4536
4537 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4538 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4539 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4540 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4541 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4542 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4543 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4544 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4545 command.
4546
4547 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4548 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4549 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4550 @smallexample
4551 data.o
4552 @end smallexample
4553
4554 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4555 and does not contain any wild card
4556 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4557 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4558 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4559 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4560 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4561 the archive search path.
4562
4563 @node Input Section Wildcards
4564 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4565 @cindex input section wildcards
4566 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4567 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4568 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4569 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4570 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4571
4572 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4573 pattern for the file name.
4574
4575 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4576
4577 @table @samp
4578 @item *
4579 matches any number of characters
4580 @item ?
4581 matches any single character
4582 @item [@var{chars}]
4583 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4584 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4585 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4586 @item \
4587 quotes the following character
4588 @end table
4589
4590 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4591 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4592 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4593 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4594 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4595 a @samp{/} character.
4596
4597 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4598 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4599 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4600
4601 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4602 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4603 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4604 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4605 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4606 @smallexample
4607 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4608 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4609 @end smallexample
4610
4611 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4612 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4613 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4614 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4615 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4616 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4617 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4618
4619 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4620 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4621 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4622 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4623 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4624 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4625
4626 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4627 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4628 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4629 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4630 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4631
4632 @cindex SORT
4633 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4634
4635 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4636 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4637
4638 @enumerate
4639 @item
4640 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4641 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4642 sections have the same name.
4643 @item
4644 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4645 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4646 sections have the same alignment.
4647 @item
4648 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4649 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4650 @item
4651 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4652 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4653 @item
4654 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4655 @end enumerate
4656
4657 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4658 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4659 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4660
4661 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4662 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4663 treated as nested sorting command.
4664
4665 @enumerate
4666 @item
4667 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4668 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4669 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4670 @item
4671 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4672 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4673 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4674 @end enumerate
4675
4676 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4677 command-line option will be ignored.
4678
4679 @cindex SORT_NONE
4680 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4681 section sorting option.
4682
4683 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4684 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4685 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4686
4687 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4688 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4689 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4690 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4691 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4692 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4693 @smallexample
4694 @group
4695 SECTIONS @{
4696 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4697 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4698 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4699 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4700 @}
4701 @end group
4702 @end smallexample
4703
4704 @node Input Section Common
4705 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4706 @cindex common symbol placement
4707 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4708 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4709 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4710 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4711 named @samp{COMMON}.
4712
4713 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4714 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4715 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4716 input files are placed in another section.
4717
4718 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4719 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4720 @smallexample
4721 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4722 @end smallexample
4723
4724 @cindex scommon section
4725 @cindex small common symbols
4726 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4727 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4728 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4729 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4730 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4731 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4732 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4733 locations.
4734
4735 @cindex [COMMON]
4736 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4737 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4738 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4739
4740 @node Input Section Keep
4741 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4742 @cindex KEEP
4743 @cindex garbage collection
4744 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4745 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4746 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4747 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4748 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4749
4750 @node Input Section Example
4751 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4752 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4753 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4754 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4755 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4756 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4757 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4758 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4759 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4760 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4761
4762 @smallexample
4763 @group
4764 SECTIONS @{
4765 outputa 0x10000 :
4766 @{
4767 all.o
4768 foo.o (.input1)
4769 @}
4770 @end group
4771 @group
4772 outputb :
4773 @{
4774 foo.o (.input2)
4775 foo1.o (.input1)
4776 @}
4777 @end group
4778 @group
4779 outputc :
4780 @{
4781 *(.input1)
4782 *(.input2)
4783 @}
4784 @}
4785 @end group
4786 @end smallexample
4787
4788 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4789 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4790 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4791 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4792 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4793 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4794 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4795
4796 @node Output Section Data
4797 @subsection Output Section Data
4798 @cindex data
4799 @cindex section data
4800 @cindex output section data
4801 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4802 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4803 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4804 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4805 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4806 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4807 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4808 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4809 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4810 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4811 counter.
4812
4813 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4814 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4815 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4816 stored.
4817
4818 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4819 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4820 @smallexample
4821 BYTE(1)
4822 LONG(addr)
4823 @end smallexample
4824
4825 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4826 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4827 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4828 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4829 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4830
4831 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4832 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4833 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4834 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4835 endianness of the first input object file.
4836
4837 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4838 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4839 @smallexample
4840 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4841 @end smallexample
4842 whereas this will work:
4843 @smallexample
4844 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4845 @end smallexample
4846
4847 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4848 @cindex holes, filling
4849 @cindex unspecified memory
4850 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4851 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4852 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4853 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4854 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4855 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4856 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4857 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4858 different parts of an output section.
4859
4860 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4861 value @samp{0x90}:
4862 @smallexample
4863 FILL(0x90909090)
4864 @end smallexample
4865
4866 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4867 section attribute, but it only affects the
4868 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4869 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4870 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4871 expression.
4872
4873 @node Output Section Keywords
4874 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4875 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4876 commands.
4877
4878 @table @code
4879 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4880 @cindex input filename symbols
4881 @cindex filename symbols
4882 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4883 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4884 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4885 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4886 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4887
4888 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4889 normally used for any other object file format.
4890
4891 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4892 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4893 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4894 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4895 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4896 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4897 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4898 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4899 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4900 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4901 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4902 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4903 ignored for other object file formats.
4904
4905 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4906 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4907 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4908 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4909 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4910 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4911 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4912 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4913 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4914 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4915 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4916 @code{exit}.
4917
4918 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4919 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4920 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4921 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4922 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4923 runtime code expects to see.
4924
4925 @smallexample
4926 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4927 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4928 *(.ctors)
4929 LONG(0)
4930 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4931 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4932 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4933 *(.dtors)
4934 LONG(0)
4935 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4936 @end smallexample
4937
4938 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4939 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4940 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4941 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4942 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4943 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4944 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4945 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4946
4947 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4948 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4949 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4950 scripts.
4951
4952 @end table
4953
4954 @node Output Section Discarding
4955 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4956 @cindex discarding sections
4957 @cindex sections, discarding
4958 @cindex removing sections
4959 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4960 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4961 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4962 @smallexample
4963 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4964 @end smallexample
4965 @noindent
4966 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4967 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4968 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4969 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4970 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4971 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4972 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4973 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4974 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4975
4976 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4977 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4978 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4979 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4980 section is discarded.
4981
4982 @cindex /DISCARD/
4983 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4984 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4985 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4986
4987 @node Output Section Attributes
4988 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4989 @cindex output section attributes
4990 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4991 like this:
4992
4993 @smallexample
4994 @group
4995 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4996 [AT(@var{lma})]
4997 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4998 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4999 [@var{constraint}]
5000 @{
5001 @var{output-section-command}
5002 @var{output-section-command}
5003 @dots{}
5004 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5005 @end group
5006 @end smallexample
5007
5008 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5009 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5010 remaining section attributes.
5011
5012 @menu
5013 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5014 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5015 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5016 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5017 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5018 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5019 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5020 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5021 @end menu
5022
5023 @node Output Section Type
5024 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5025 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5026 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5027
5028 @table @code
5029 @item NOLOAD
5030 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5031 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5032 @item DSECT
5033 @itemx COPY
5034 @itemx INFO
5035 @itemx OVERLAY
5036 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5037 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5038 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5039 section when the program is run.
5040 @end table
5041
5042 @kindex NOLOAD
5043 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5044 @cindex loading, preventing
5045 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5046 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5047 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5048 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5049 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5050 @smallexample
5051 @group
5052 SECTIONS @{
5053 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5054 @dots{}
5055 @}
5056 @end group
5057 @end smallexample
5058
5059 @node Output Section LMA
5060 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5061 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5062 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5063 @cindex load address
5064 @cindex section load address
5065 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5066 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5067 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5068 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5069 address is optional.
5070
5071 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5072 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5073 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5074 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5075 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5076
5077 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5078 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5079 load address:
5080
5081 @itemize @bullet
5082 @item
5083 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5084 the LMA address as well.
5085
5086 @item
5087 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5088
5089 @item
5090 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5091 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5092 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5093 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5094 the last section in the located region.
5095
5096 @item
5097 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5098 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5099
5100 @item
5101 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5102 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5103 @end itemize
5104
5105 @cindex ROM initialized data
5106 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5107 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5108 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5109 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5110 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5111 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5112 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5113 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5114 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5115
5116 @smallexample
5117 @group
5118 SECTIONS
5119 @{
5120 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5121 .mdata 0x2000 :
5122 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5123 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5124 .bss 0x3000 :
5125 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5126 @}
5127 @end group
5128 @end smallexample
5129
5130 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5131 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5132 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5133 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5134 script.
5135
5136 @smallexample
5137 @group
5138 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5139 char *src = &_etext;
5140 char *dst = &_data;
5141
5142 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5143 while (dst < &_edata)
5144 *dst++ = *src++;
5145
5146 /* Zero bss. */
5147 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5148 *dst = 0;
5149 @end group
5150 @end smallexample
5151
5152 @node Forced Output Alignment
5153 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5154 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5155 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5156 @cindex output section alignment
5157 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5158 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5159 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5160
5161 @node Forced Input Alignment
5162 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5163 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5164 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5165 @cindex input section alignment
5166 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5167 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5168 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5169
5170 @node Output Section Constraint
5171 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5172 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5173 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5174 @cindex constraints on output sections
5175 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5176 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5177 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5178 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5179
5180 @node Output Section Region
5181 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5182 @kindex >@var{region}
5183 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5184 @cindex memory regions and sections
5185 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5186 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5187
5188 Here is a simple example:
5189 @smallexample
5190 @group
5191 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5192 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5193 @end group
5194 @end smallexample
5195
5196 @node Output Section Phdr
5197 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5198 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5199 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5200 @cindex program headers and sections
5201 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5202 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5203 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5204 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5205 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5206 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5207
5208 Here is a simple example:
5209 @smallexample
5210 @group
5211 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5212 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5213 @end group
5214 @end smallexample
5215
5216 @node Output Section Fill
5217 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5218 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5219 @cindex section fill pattern
5220 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5221 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5222 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5223 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5224 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5225 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5226 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5227 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5228 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5229 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5230 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5231 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5232 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5233
5234 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5235 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5236
5237 Here is a simple example:
5238 @smallexample
5239 @group
5240 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5241 @end group
5242 @end smallexample
5243
5244 @node Overlay Description
5245 @subsection Overlay Description
5246 @kindex OVERLAY
5247 @cindex overlays
5248 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5249 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5250 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5251 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5252 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5253 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5254 than another.
5255
5256 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5257 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5258 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5259 command is as follows:
5260 @smallexample
5261 @group
5262 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5263 @{
5264 @var{secname1}
5265 @{
5266 @var{output-section-command}
5267 @var{output-section-command}
5268 @dots{}
5269 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5270 @var{secname2}
5271 @{
5272 @var{output-section-command}
5273 @var{output-section-command}
5274 @dots{}
5275 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5276 @dots{}
5277 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5278 @end group
5279 @end smallexample
5280
5281 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5282 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5283 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5284 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5285 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5286 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5287
5288 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5289 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5290
5291 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5292 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5293 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5294 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5295 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5296 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5297
5298 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5299 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5300 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5301 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5302 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5303
5304 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5305 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5306 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5307 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5308 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5309 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5310 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5311
5312 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5313 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5314
5315 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5316 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5317 @smallexample
5318 @group
5319 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5320 @{
5321 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5322 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5323 @}
5324 @end group
5325 @end smallexample
5326 @noindent
5327 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5328 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5329 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5330 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5331 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5332 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5333
5334 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5335 like the following.
5336
5337 @smallexample
5338 @group
5339 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5340 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5341 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5342 @end group
5343 @end smallexample
5344
5345 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5346 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5347 example could have been written identically as follows.
5348
5349 @smallexample
5350 @group
5351 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5352 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5353 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5354 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5355 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5356 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5357 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5358 @end group
5359 @end smallexample
5360
5361 @node MEMORY
5362 @section MEMORY Command
5363 @kindex MEMORY
5364 @cindex memory regions
5365 @cindex regions of memory
5366 @cindex allocating memory
5367 @cindex discontinuous memory
5368 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5369 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5370
5371 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5372 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5373 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5374 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5375 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5376 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5377 around to fit into the available regions.
5378
5379 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5380 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5381 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5382 @code{MEMORY} is:
5383 @smallexample
5384 @group
5385 MEMORY
5386 @{
5387 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5388 @dots{}
5389 @}
5390 @end group
5391 @end smallexample
5392
5393 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5394 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5395 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5396 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5397 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5398 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5399 command.
5400
5401 @cindex memory region attributes
5402 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5403 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5404 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5405 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5406 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5407 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5408 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5409
5410 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5411 @table @samp
5412 @item R
5413 Read-only section
5414 @item W
5415 Read/write section
5416 @item X
5417 Executable section
5418 @item A
5419 Allocatable section
5420 @item I
5421 Initialized section
5422 @item L
5423 Same as @samp{I}
5424 @item !
5425 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5426 @end table
5427
5428 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5429 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5430 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5431 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5432 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5433 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5434 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5435 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5436
5437 @kindex ORIGIN =
5438 @kindex o =
5439 @kindex org =
5440 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5441 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5442 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5443 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5444 @code{ORG}).
5445
5446 @kindex LENGTH =
5447 @kindex len =
5448 @kindex l =
5449 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5450 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5451 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5452 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5453
5454 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5455 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5456 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5457 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5458 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5459 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5460 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5461 region.
5462
5463 @smallexample
5464 @group
5465 MEMORY
5466 @{
5467 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5468 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5469 @}
5470 @end group
5471 @end smallexample
5472
5473 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5474 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5475 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5476 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5477 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5478 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5479 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5480 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5481 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5482
5483 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5484 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5485 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5486
5487 @smallexample
5488 @group
5489 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5490 @end group
5491 @end smallexample
5492
5493 @node PHDRS
5494 @section PHDRS Command
5495 @kindex PHDRS
5496 @cindex program headers
5497 @cindex ELF program headers
5498 @cindex program segments
5499 @cindex segments, ELF
5500 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5501 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5502 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5503 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5504
5505 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5506 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5507 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5508 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5509 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5510
5511 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5512 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5513 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5514 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5515 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5516
5517 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5518 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5519 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5520
5521 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5522 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5523
5524 @smallexample
5525 @group
5526 PHDRS
5527 @{
5528 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5529 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5530 @}
5531 @end group
5532 @end smallexample
5533
5534 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5535 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5536 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5537 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5538 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5539 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5540
5541 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5542 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5543 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5544 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5545 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5546 Section Phdr}.
5547
5548 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5549 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5550 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5551 contain the section.
5552
5553 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5554 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5555 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5556 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5557 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5558 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5559 segment at all.
5560
5561 @kindex FILEHDR
5562 @kindex PHDRS
5563 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5564 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5565 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5566 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5567 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5568 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5569 these keywords.
5570
5571 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5572 value of the keyword.
5573
5574 @table @asis
5575 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5576 Indicates an unused program header.
5577
5578 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5579 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5580 the file.
5581
5582 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5583 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5584
5585 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5586 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5587 found.
5588
5589 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5590 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5591
5592 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5593 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5594 ABI.
5595
5596 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5597 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5598
5599 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5600 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5601
5602 @item @var{expression}
5603 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5604 be used for types not defined above.
5605 @end table
5606
5607 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5608 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5609 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5610 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5611 output section attribute.
5612
5613 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5614 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5615 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5616 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5617 header.
5618
5619 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5620 headers used on a native ELF system.
5621
5622 @example
5623 @group
5624 PHDRS
5625 @{
5626 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5627 interp PT_INTERP ;
5628 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5629 data PT_LOAD ;
5630 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5631 @}
5632
5633 SECTIONS
5634 @{
5635 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5636 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5637 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5638 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5639 @dots{}
5640 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5641 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5642 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5643 @dots{}
5644 @}
5645 @end group
5646 @end example
5647
5648 @node VERSION
5649 @section VERSION Command
5650 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5651 @cindex symbol versions
5652 @cindex version script
5653 @cindex versions of symbols
5654 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5655 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5656 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5657 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5658 shared library.
5659
5660 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5661 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5662 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5663
5664 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5665 @smallexample
5666 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5667 @end smallexample
5668
5669 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5670 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5671 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5672 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5673 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5674 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5675 library.
5676
5677 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5678 examples.
5679
5680 @smallexample
5681 VERS_1.1 @{
5682 global:
5683 foo1;
5684 local:
5685 old*;
5686 original*;
5687 new*;
5688 @};
5689
5690 VERS_1.2 @{
5691 foo2;
5692 @} VERS_1.1;
5693
5694 VERS_2.0 @{
5695 bar1; bar2;
5696 extern "C++" @{
5697 ns::*;
5698 "f(int, double)";
5699 @};
5700 @} VERS_1.2;
5701 @end smallexample
5702
5703 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5704 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5705 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5706 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5707 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5708 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5709 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5710 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5711 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5712 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5713
5714 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5715 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5716 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5717
5718 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5719 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5720 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5721
5722 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5723 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5724 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5725 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5726 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5727 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5728 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5729 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5730 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5731
5732 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5733 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5734 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5735 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5736
5737 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5738 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5739 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5740 won't.
5741
5742 @smallexample
5743 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5744 @end smallexample
5745
5746 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5747 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5748 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5749 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5750 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5751 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5752 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5753 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5754 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5755 search for each symbol reference.
5756
5757 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5758 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5759 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5760 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5761 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5762 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5763 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5764 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5765 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5766
5767 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5768 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5769 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5770 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5771 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5772 @smallexample
5773 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5774 @end smallexample
5775 @noindent
5776 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5777 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5778 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5779 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5780 takes precedence over a version script.
5781
5782 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5783 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5784 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5785 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5786 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5787
5788 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5789 source file. Here is an example:
5790
5791 @smallexample
5792 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5793 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5794 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5795 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5796 @end smallexample
5797
5798 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5799 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5800 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5801 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5802
5803 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5804 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5805 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5806 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5807 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5808 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5809
5810 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5811 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5812 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5813 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5814
5815 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5816
5817 @smallexample
5818 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5819 @end smallexample
5820
5821 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5822 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5823 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5824 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5825 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5826
5827 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5828 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5829 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5830 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5831 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5832 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5833 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5834 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5835 expect when you upgrade.
5836
5837 @node Expressions
5838 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5839 @cindex expressions
5840 @cindex arithmetic
5841 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5842 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5843 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5844 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5845
5846 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5847
5848 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5849 expressions.
5850
5851 @menu
5852 * Constants:: Constants
5853 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5854 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5855 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5856 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5857 * Operators:: Operators
5858 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5859 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5860 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5861 @end menu
5862
5863 @node Constants
5864 @subsection Constants
5865 @cindex integer notation
5866 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5867 All constants are integers.
5868
5869 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5870 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5871 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5872 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5873 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5874 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5875
5876 @cindex scaled integers
5877 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5878 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5879 @cindex suffixes for integers
5880 @cindex integer suffixes
5881 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5882 constant by
5883 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5884 @ifnottex
5885 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5886 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5887 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5888 @end ifnottex
5889 @tex
5890 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5891 @end tex
5892 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5893 respectively. For example, the following
5894 all refer to the same quantity:
5895
5896 @smallexample
5897 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5898 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5899 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5900 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5901 @end smallexample
5902
5903 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5904 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5905
5906 @node Symbolic Constants
5907 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5908 @cindex symbolic constants
5909 @kindex CONSTANT
5910 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
5911 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5912
5913 @table @code
5914 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5915 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5916 The target's maximum page size.
5917
5918 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5919 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5920 The target's default page size.
5921 @end table
5922
5923 So for example:
5924
5925 @smallexample
5926 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5927 @end smallexample
5928
5929 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5930 supported by the target.
5931
5932 @node Symbols
5933 @subsection Symbol Names
5934 @cindex symbol names
5935 @cindex names
5936 @cindex quoted symbol names
5937 @kindex "
5938 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5939 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5940 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5941 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5942 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5943 @smallexample
5944 "SECTION" = 9;
5945 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5946 @end smallexample
5947
5948 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5949 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5950 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5951
5952 @node Orphan Sections
5953 @subsection Orphan Sections
5954 @cindex orphan
5955 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5956 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5957 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5958 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5959 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5960
5961 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5962 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5963 placed at the end of that output section.
5964
5965 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5966 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5967 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5968 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5969 one new output section.
5970
5971 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5972 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5973 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5974 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5975 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5976 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5977 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5978
5979 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5980 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5981 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5982
5983 @node Location Counter
5984 @subsection The Location Counter
5985 @kindex .
5986 @cindex dot
5987 @cindex location counter
5988 @cindex current output location
5989 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5990 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5991 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5992 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5993 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5994
5995 @cindex holes
5996 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5997 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5998 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5999 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6000 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6001
6002 @smallexample
6003 SECTIONS
6004 @{
6005 output :
6006 @{
6007 file1(.text)
6008 . = . + 1000;
6009 file2(.text)
6010 . += 1000;
6011 file3(.text)
6012 @} = 0x12345678;
6013 @}
6014 @end smallexample
6015 @noindent
6016 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6017 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6018 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6019 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6020 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6021 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6022
6023 @cindex dot inside sections
6024 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6025 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6026 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6027 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6028 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6029 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6030
6031 @smallexample
6032 SECTIONS
6033 @{
6034 . = 0x100
6035 .text: @{
6036 *(.text)
6037 . = 0x200
6038 @}
6039 . = 0x500
6040 .data: @{
6041 *(.data)
6042 . += 0x600
6043 @}
6044 @}
6045 @end smallexample
6046
6047 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6048 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6049 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6050 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6051 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6052 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6053 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6054 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6055
6056 @cindex dot outside sections
6057 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6058 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6059 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6060
6061 @smallexample
6062 SECTIONS
6063 @{
6064 start_of_text = . ;
6065 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6066 end_of_text = . ;
6067
6068 start_of_data = . ;
6069 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6070 end_of_data = . ;
6071 @}
6072 @end smallexample
6073
6074 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6075 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6076 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6077 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6078 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6079 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6080 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6081 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6082 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6083 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6084 as follows:
6085
6086 @smallexample
6087 SECTIONS
6088 @{
6089 start_of_text = . ;
6090 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6091 end_of_text = . ;
6092
6093 start_of_data = . ;
6094 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6095 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6096 end_of_data = . ;
6097 @}
6098 @end smallexample
6099
6100 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6101 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6102 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6103 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6104 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6105 section. So you could write:
6106
6107 @smallexample
6108 SECTIONS
6109 @{
6110 start_of_text = . ;
6111 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6112 end_of_text = . ;
6113
6114 . = . ;
6115 start_of_data = . ;
6116 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6117 end_of_data = . ;
6118 @}
6119 @end smallexample
6120
6121 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6122 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6123
6124 @need 2000
6125 @node Operators
6126 @subsection Operators
6127 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6128 @cindex arithmetic operators
6129 @cindex precedence in expressions
6130 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6131 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6132 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6133 @ifnottex
6134 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6135 @smallexample
6136 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6137 (highest)
6138 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6139 2 left * / %
6140 3 left + -
6141 4 left >> <<
6142 5 left == != > < <= >=
6143 6 left &
6144 7 left |
6145 8 left &&
6146 9 left ||
6147 10 right ? :
6148 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6149 (lowest)
6150 @end smallexample
6151 Notes:
6152 (1) Prefix operators
6153 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6154 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6155 @end ifnottex
6156 @tex
6157 \vskip \baselineskip
6158 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6159 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6160 \hrule
6161 \halign
6162 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6163 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6164 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6165 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6166 \noalign{\hrule}
6167 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6168 &highest&&&&&\cr
6169 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6170 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6171 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6172 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6173 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6174 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6175 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6176 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6177 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6178 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6179 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6180 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6181 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6182 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6183 \hrule}
6184 @end tex
6185 @iftex
6186 {
6187 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6188 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6189 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6190 }
6191 @end iftex
6192 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6193
6194 @node Evaluation
6195 @subsection Evaluation
6196 @cindex lazy evaluation
6197 @cindex expression evaluation order
6198 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6199 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6200
6201 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6202 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6203 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6204 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6205
6206 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6207 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6208 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6209 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6210
6211 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6212 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6213 allocation.
6214
6215 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6216 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6217
6218 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6219 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6220 following
6221 @smallexample
6222 @group
6223 SECTIONS
6224 @{
6225 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6226 @{ *(.text) @}
6227 @}
6228 @end group
6229 @end smallexample
6230 @noindent
6231 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6232 address}.
6233
6234 @node Expression Section
6235 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6236 @cindex expression sections
6237 @cindex absolute expressions
6238 @cindex relative expressions
6239 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6240 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6241 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6242 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6243 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6244 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6245 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6246 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6247 operations.
6248
6249 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6250 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6251 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6252 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6253 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6254 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6255 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6256 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6257 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6258 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6259 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6260 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6261 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6262 everywhere.
6263
6264 In the following simple example,
6265
6266 @smallexample
6267 @group
6268 SECTIONS
6269 @{
6270 . = 0x100;
6271 __executable_start = 0x100;
6272 .data :
6273 @{
6274 . = 0x10;
6275 __data_start = 0x10;
6276 *(.data)
6277 @}
6278 @dots{}
6279 @}
6280 @end group
6281 @end smallexample
6282
6283 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6284 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6285 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6286 section in the second two assignments.
6287
6288 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6289 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6290
6291 @itemize @bullet
6292 @item
6293 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6294 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6295 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6296 @item
6297 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6298 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6299 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6300 @item
6301 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6302 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6303 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6304 before applying the operator.
6305 @end itemize
6306
6307 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6308
6309 @itemize @bullet
6310 @item
6311 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6312 @item
6313 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6314 @item
6315 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6316 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6317 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6318 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6319 but an absolute address otherwise.
6320 @item
6321 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6322 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6323 section as the relative operand(s).
6324 @item
6325 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6326 conversions) is an absolute address.
6327 @end itemize
6328
6329 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6330 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6331 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6332 section @samp{.data}:
6333 @smallexample
6334 SECTIONS
6335 @{
6336 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6337 @}
6338 @end smallexample
6339 @noindent
6340 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6341 @samp{.data} section.
6342
6343 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6344 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6345
6346 @node Builtin Functions
6347 @subsection Builtin Functions
6348 @cindex functions in expressions
6349 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6350 use in linker script expressions.
6351
6352 @table @code
6353 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6354 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6355 @cindex expression, absolute
6356 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6357 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6358 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6359 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6360
6361 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6362 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6363 @cindex section address in expression
6364 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6365 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6366 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6367 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6368 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6369 the other two will be absolute:
6370 @smallexample
6371 @group
6372 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6373 .output1 :
6374 @{
6375 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6376 @dots{}
6377 @}
6378 .output :
6379 @{
6380 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6381 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6382 @}
6383 @dots{} @}
6384 @end group
6385 @end smallexample
6386
6387 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6388 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6389 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6390 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6391 @cindex round up location counter
6392 @cindex align location counter
6393 @cindex round up expression
6394 @cindex align expression
6395 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6396 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6397 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6398 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6399 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6400 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6401
6402 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6403 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6404 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6405 input sections:
6406 @smallexample
6407 @group
6408 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6409 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6410 *(.data)
6411 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6412 @}
6413 @dots{} @}
6414 @end group
6415 @end smallexample
6416 @noindent
6417 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6418 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6419 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6420 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6421
6422 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6423
6424 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6425 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6426 @cindex section alignment
6427 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6428 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6429 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6430 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6431 value in that section.
6432 @smallexample
6433 @group
6434 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6435 .output @{
6436 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6437 @dots{}
6438 @}
6439 @dots{} @}
6440 @end group
6441 @end smallexample
6442
6443 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6444 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6445 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6446 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6447 section.
6448
6449 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6450 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6451 This is equivalent to either
6452 @smallexample
6453 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6454 @end smallexample
6455 or
6456 @smallexample
6457 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6458 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6459 @end smallexample
6460 @noindent
6461 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6462 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6463 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6464 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6465 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6466 bytes in the on-disk file.
6467
6468 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6469 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6470 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6471 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6472 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6473 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6474 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6475
6476 @noindent
6477 Example:
6478 @smallexample
6479 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6480 @end smallexample
6481
6482 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6483 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6484 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6485 evaluation purposes.
6486
6487 @smallexample
6488 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6489 @end smallexample
6490
6491 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6492 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6493 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6494 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6495 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6496 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6497 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6498 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6499 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6500 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6501 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6502 section alignment.
6503
6504 @smallexample
6505 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6506 @end smallexample
6507
6508 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6509 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6510 @cindex symbol defaults
6511 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6512 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6513 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6514 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6515 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6516 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6517 existed, its value is preserved:
6518
6519 @smallexample
6520 @group
6521 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6522 .text : @{
6523 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6524 @dots{}
6525 @}
6526 @dots{}
6527 @}
6528 @end group
6529 @end smallexample
6530
6531 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6532 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6533 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6534
6535 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6536 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6537 @cindex section load address in expression
6538 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6539 Section LMA}).
6540
6541 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6542 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6543 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6544 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6545
6546 @kindex MAX
6547 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6548 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6549
6550 @kindex MIN
6551 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6552 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6553
6554 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6555 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6556 @cindex unallocated address, next
6557 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6558 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6559 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6560 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6561
6562 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6563 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6564 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6565
6566 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6567 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6568 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6569 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6570 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6571 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6572 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6573 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6574 name.
6575
6576 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6577 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6578 @cindex section size
6579 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6580 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6581 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6582 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6583 @smallexample
6584 @group
6585 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6586 .output @{
6587 .start = . ;
6588 @dots{}
6589 .end = . ;
6590 @}
6591 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6592 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6593 @dots{} @}
6594 @end group
6595 @end smallexample
6596
6597 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6598 @itemx sizeof_headers
6599 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6600 @cindex header size
6601 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6602 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6603 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6604 choose, to facilitate paging.
6605
6606 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6607 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6608 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6609 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6610 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6611 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6612 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6613 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6614 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6615 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6616 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6617 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6618 @end table
6619
6620 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6621 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6622 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6623 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6624 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6625 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6626 linker will report an error.
6627
6628 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6629
6630 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6631 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6632 commands.
6633
6634 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6635 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6636 read. This can affect archive searching.
6637
6638 @ifset GENERIC
6639 @node Machine Dependent
6640 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6641
6642 @cindex machine dependencies
6643 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6644 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6645 functionality are not listed.
6646
6647 @menu
6648 @ifset H8300
6649 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6650 @end ifset
6651 @ifset M68HC11
6652 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6653 @end ifset
6654 @ifset ARM
6655 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6656 @end ifset
6657 @ifset HPPA
6658 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6659 @end ifset
6660 @ifset M68K
6661 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6662 @end ifset
6663 @ifset MIPS
6664 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6665 @end ifset
6666 @ifset MMIX
6667 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6668 @end ifset
6669 @ifset MSP430
6670 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6671 @end ifset
6672 @ifset NDS32
6673 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6674 @end ifset
6675 @ifset NIOSII
6676 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6677 @end ifset
6678 @ifset POWERPC
6679 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6680 @end ifset
6681 @ifset POWERPC64
6682 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6683 @end ifset
6684 @ifset S/390
6685 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6686 @end ifset
6687 @ifset SPU
6688 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6689 @end ifset
6690 @ifset TICOFF
6691 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6692 @end ifset
6693 @ifset WIN32
6694 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6695 @end ifset
6696 @ifset XTENSA
6697 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6698 @end ifset
6699 @end menu
6700 @end ifset
6701
6702 @ifset H8300
6703 @ifclear GENERIC
6704 @raisesections
6705 @end ifclear
6706
6707 @node H8/300
6708 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6709
6710 @cindex H8/300 support
6711 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6712 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6713
6714 @table @emph
6715 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6716 @item relaxing address modes
6717 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6718 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6719 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6720 respectively.
6721
6722 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6723 @item synthesizing instructions
6724 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6725 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6726 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6727 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6728 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6729 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6730 top page of memory).
6731
6732 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6733 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6734 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6735 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6736 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6737 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6738 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6739
6740 @item bit manipulation instructions
6741 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6742 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6743 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6744 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6745 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6746 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6747 the top page of memory).
6748
6749 @item system control instructions
6750 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6751 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6752 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6753 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6754 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6755 the top page of memory).
6756 @end table
6757
6758 @ifclear GENERIC
6759 @lowersections
6760 @end ifclear
6761 @end ifset
6762
6763 @ifclear GENERIC
6764 @ifset Renesas
6765 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6766 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6767 @node Renesas
6768 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6769
6770 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6771 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6772 options are required for these chips.
6773 @end ifset
6774 @end ifclear
6775
6776 @ifset ARM
6777 @ifclear GENERIC
6778 @raisesections
6779 @end ifclear
6780
6781 @ifset M68HC11
6782 @ifclear GENERIC
6783 @raisesections
6784 @end ifclear
6785
6786 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6787 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6788
6789 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6790
6791 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6792
6793 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6794 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6795
6796 @table @emph
6797 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6798 @item relaxing address modes
6799 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6800 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6801 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6802 respectively.
6803
6804 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6805 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6806 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6807
6808 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6809 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6810 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6811 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6812 @code{bset} instructions.
6813
6814 @end table
6815
6816 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6817
6818 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6819 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6820 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6821 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6822 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6823 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6824 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6825 point to the function trampoline.
6826
6827 @ifclear GENERIC
6828 @lowersections
6829 @end ifclear
6830 @end ifset
6831
6832 @node ARM
6833 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6834
6835 @cindex ARM interworking support
6836 @kindex --support-old-code
6837 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6838 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6839 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6840 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6841 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6842 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6843 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6844 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6845 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6846 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6847
6848 @cindex thumb entry point
6849 @cindex entry point, thumb
6850 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6851 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6852 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6853 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6854 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6855 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6856
6857 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6858 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6859 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6860 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6861 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6862 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6863
6864 @cindex BE8
6865 @kindex --be8
6866 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6867 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6868 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6869 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6870 little-endian code.
6871
6872 @cindex TARGET1
6873 @kindex --target1-rel
6874 @kindex --target1-abs
6875 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6876 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6877 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6878 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6879
6880 @cindex TARGET2
6881 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6882 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6883 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6884 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6885 @table @samp
6886 @item rel
6887 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6888 @item abs
6889 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6890 @item got-rel
6891 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6892 @end table
6893
6894 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6895 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6896 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6897 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6898 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6899 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6900
6901 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6902 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6903 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6904
6905 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6906 relocations are ignored.
6907
6908 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6909 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6910 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6911 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6912
6913 @smallexample
6914 TST rM, #1
6915 MOVEQ PC, rM
6916 BX Rn
6917 @end smallexample
6918
6919 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6920 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6921 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6922
6923 @cindex USE_BLX
6924 @kindex --use-blx
6925 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6926 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6927 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6928 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6929 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6930
6931 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6932 specify it if you are using that target.
6933
6934 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6935 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6936 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6937 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6938 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6939 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6940 the support code can read the intended values.
6941
6942 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6943 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6944 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6945 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6946 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6947 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6948
6949 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6950 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6951 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6952 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6953 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6954 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6955
6956 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6957 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6958 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6959 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6960 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6961 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6962 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6963
6964 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6965 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6966 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6967 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6968 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6969 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6970 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6971
6972 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6973 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6974 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6975
6976 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6977 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6978
6979 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6980 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6981 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6982 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6983 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6984 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6985 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6986 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6987
6988 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6989 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6990
6991 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6992 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6993 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6994 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6995 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6996
6997 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6998 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6999 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7000 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7001 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7002 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7003
7004 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7005 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7006
7007 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7008 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7009 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7010 occurs.
7011
7012 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7013 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7014 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7015 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7016 occurs.
7017
7018 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7019 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7020 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7021 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7022 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7023 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7024 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7025 not be diagnosed.
7026
7027 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7028 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7029 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7030 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7031 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7032 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7033 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7034
7035 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7036 @kindex --pic-veneer
7037 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7038 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7039 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7040 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7041
7042 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7043 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7044 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7045 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7046 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7047 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7048 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7049 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7050 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7051 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7052 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7053 where they should be placed.
7054
7055 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7056 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7057 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7058 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7059 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7060 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7061 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7062 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7063 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7064 from the input sections.
7065
7066 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7067 @samp{N = +1}.
7068
7069 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7070 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7071 otherwise.
7072
7073 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7074 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7075 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7076 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7077
7078 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7079
7080 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7081 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7082 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7083 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7084
7085 Please contact ARM for further details.
7086
7087 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7088 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7089 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7090 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7091
7092 @kindex --long-plt
7093 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7094 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7095 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7096 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7097
7098 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7099 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7100 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7101 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7102
7103 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7104 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7105 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7106 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7107 veneers in memory.
7108
7109 @kindex --cmse-implib
7110 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7111 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7112 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7113 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7114 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7115
7116 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7117 @cindex Input import library
7118 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7119 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7120 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7121 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7122 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7123 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7124 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7125 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7126 specified.
7127
7128 @ifclear GENERIC
7129 @lowersections
7130 @end ifclear
7131 @end ifset
7132
7133 @ifset HPPA
7134 @ifclear GENERIC
7135 @raisesections
7136 @end ifclear
7137
7138 @node HPPA ELF32
7139 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7140 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7141 @kindex --multi-subspace
7142 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7143 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7144 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7145 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7146 multiple sub-spaces.
7147
7148 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7149 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7150 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7151 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7152 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7153 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7154 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7155 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7156 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7157 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7158 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7159 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7160 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7161 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7162 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7163 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7164
7165 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7166 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7167 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7168 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7169
7170 @ifclear GENERIC
7171 @lowersections
7172 @end ifclear
7173 @end ifset
7174
7175 @ifset M68K
7176 @ifclear GENERIC
7177 @raisesections
7178 @end ifclear
7179
7180 @node M68K
7181 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7182
7183 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7184 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7185 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7186 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7187 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7188 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7189 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7190 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7191 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7192 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7193 support such GOTs.
7194 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7195 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7196 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7197 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7198
7199 @ifclear GENERIC
7200 @lowersections
7201 @end ifclear
7202 @end ifset
7203
7204 @ifset MIPS
7205 @ifclear GENERIC
7206 @raisesections
7207 @end ifclear
7208
7209 @node MIPS
7210 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7211
7212 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7213 @kindex --insn32
7214 @kindex --no-insn32
7215 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7216 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7217 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7218 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7219 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7220 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7221
7222 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7223 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7224 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7225 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7226 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7227 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7228 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7229 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7230 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7231 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7232 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7233 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7234
7235 @ifclear GENERIC
7236 @lowersections
7237 @end ifclear
7238 @end ifset
7239
7240 @ifset MMIX
7241 @ifclear GENERIC
7242 @raisesections
7243 @end ifclear
7244
7245 @node MMIX
7246 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7247 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7248 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7249 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7250 can translate between the two formats.
7251
7252 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7253 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7254 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7255 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7256 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7257 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7258 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7259 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7260
7261 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7262 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7263 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7264 of a section.
7265
7266 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7267 are left out from an mmo file.
7268
7269 @ifclear GENERIC
7270 @lowersections
7271 @end ifclear
7272 @end ifset
7273
7274 @ifset MSP430
7275 @ifclear GENERIC
7276 @raisesections
7277 @end ifclear
7278
7279 @node MSP430
7280 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7281 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7282 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7283 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7284
7285 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7286 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7287
7288 @table @code
7289 @item @samp{.vectors}
7290 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7291
7292 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7293 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7294 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7295
7296 @item @samp{.infomem}
7297 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7298 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7299
7300 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7301 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7302 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7303
7304 @item @samp{.noinit}
7305 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7306
7307 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7308 @end table
7309
7310 @table @option
7311 @cindex MSP430 Options
7312 @kindex --code-region
7313 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7314 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7315 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7316 using this option.
7317
7318 @kindex --data-region
7319 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7320 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7321 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7322 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7323
7324 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7325 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7326 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7327 and @code{--data-region} options.
7328 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7329 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7330 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7331 @end table
7332
7333 @ifclear GENERIC
7334 @lowersections
7335 @end ifclear
7336 @end ifset
7337
7338 @ifset NDS32
7339 @ifclear GENERIC
7340 @raisesections
7341 @end ifclear
7342
7343 @node NDS32
7344 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7345 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7346 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7347 relaxes objects according to these options.
7348
7349 @table @code
7350 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7351 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7352
7353 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7354 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7355
7356 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7357 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7358
7359 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7360 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7361
7362 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7363 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7364
7365 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7366 Update the existing EX9 table.
7367
7368 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7369 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7370
7371 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7372 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7373
7374 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7375 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7376
7377 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7378 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7379 @end table
7380
7381 @ifclear GENERIC
7382 @lowersections
7383 @end ifclear
7384 @end ifset
7385
7386 @ifset NIOSII
7387 @ifclear GENERIC
7388 @raisesections
7389 @end ifclear
7390
7391 @node Nios II
7392 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7393 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7394 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7395
7396 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7397 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7398 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7399 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7400 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7401 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7402 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7403 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7404 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7405 larger than 256MB.
7406
7407 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7408 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7409 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7410 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7411 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7412 register as a temporary.
7413
7414 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7415 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7416 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7417
7418 @ifclear GENERIC
7419 @lowersections
7420 @end ifclear
7421 @end ifset
7422
7423 @ifset POWERPC
7424 @ifclear GENERIC
7425 @raisesections
7426 @end ifclear
7427
7428 @node PowerPC ELF32
7429 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7430 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7431 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7432 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7433 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7434 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7435 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7436 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7437 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7438 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7439 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7440 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7441 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7442
7443 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7444 @table @option
7445 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7446 @kindex --bss-plt
7447 @item --bss-plt
7448 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7449 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7450 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7451 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7452 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7453 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7454 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7455 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7456
7457 @kindex --secure-plt
7458 @item --secure-plt
7459 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7460 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7461 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7462 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7463 style BSS PLT.
7464
7465 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7466 @kindex --sdata-got
7467 @item --sdata-got
7468 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7469 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7470 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7471 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7472 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7473 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7474 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7475 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7476 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7477 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7478 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7479 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7480
7481 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7482 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7483 @item --emit-stub-syms
7484 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7485 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7486
7487 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7488 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7489 @item --no-tls-optimize
7490 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7491 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7492 disable the optimization.
7493 @end table
7494
7495 @ifclear GENERIC
7496 @lowersections
7497 @end ifclear
7498 @end ifset
7499
7500 @ifset POWERPC64
7501 @ifclear GENERIC
7502 @raisesections
7503 @end ifclear
7504
7505 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7506 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7507
7508 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7509 @table @option
7510 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7511 @kindex --stub-group-size
7512 @item --stub-group-size
7513 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7514 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7515 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7516 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7517 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7518 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7519 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7520 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7521 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7522 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7523 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7524 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7525 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7526 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7527
7528 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7529 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7530 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7531 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7532
7533 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7534 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7535 @item --emit-stub-syms
7536 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7537 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7538
7539 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7540 @kindex --dotsyms
7541 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7542 @item --dotsyms
7543 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7544 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7545 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7546 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7547 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7548 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7549 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7550 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7551 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7552 feature.
7553
7554 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7555 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7556 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7557 @item --save-restore-funcs
7558 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7559 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7560 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7561 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7562 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7563 link.
7564
7565 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7566 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7567 @item --no-tls-optimize
7568 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7569 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7570 disable the optimization.
7571
7572 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7573 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7574 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7575 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7576 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7577 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7578 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7579 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7580 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7581 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7582 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7583 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7584 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7585 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7586 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7587
7588 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7589 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7590 @item --no-opd-optimize
7591 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7592 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7593 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7594 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7595
7596 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7597 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7598 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7599 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7600 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7601 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7602 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7603
7604 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7605 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7606 @item --no-toc-optimize
7607 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7608 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7609 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7610 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7611 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7612 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7613 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7614 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7615 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7616 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7617 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7618 optimization.
7619
7620 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7621 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7622 @item --no-multi-toc
7623 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7624 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7625 where TOC
7626 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7627 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7628 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7629 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7630 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7631 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7632 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7633 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7634
7635 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7636 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7637 @item --no-toc-sort
7638 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7639 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7640 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7641 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7642 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7643 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7644 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7645 off this feature.
7646
7647 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7648 @kindex --plt-align
7649 @kindex --no-plt-align
7650 @item --plt-align
7651 @itemx --no-plt-align
7652 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7653 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7654 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7655 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7656 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7657 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7658 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7659
7660 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7661 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7662 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7663 @item --plt-static-chain
7664 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7665 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7666 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7667 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7668
7669 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7670 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7671 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7672 @item --plt-thread-safe
7673 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7674 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7675 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7676 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7677 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7678 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7679 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7680 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7681 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7682 default behaviour.
7683
7684 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7685 @kindex --plt-localentry
7686 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7687 @item --plt-localentry
7688 @itemx --no-localentry
7689 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7690 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7691 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7692 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7693 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7694 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7695 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7696 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7697 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7698 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7699 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7700 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7701 @end table
7702
7703 @ifclear GENERIC
7704 @lowersections
7705 @end ifclear
7706 @end ifset
7707
7708 @ifset S/390
7709 @ifclear GENERIC
7710 @raisesections
7711 @end ifclear
7712
7713 @node S/390 ELF
7714 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7715
7716 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7717 @table @option
7718
7719 @cindex S/390
7720 @kindex --s390-pgste
7721 @item --s390-pgste
7722 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7723 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7724 binaries marked that way.
7725 @end table
7726
7727 @ifclear GENERIC
7728 @lowersections
7729 @end ifclear
7730 @end ifset
7731
7732 @ifset SPU
7733 @ifclear GENERIC
7734 @raisesections
7735 @end ifclear
7736
7737 @node SPU ELF
7738 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7739
7740 @cindex SPU ELF options
7741 @table @option
7742
7743 @cindex SPU plugins
7744 @kindex --plugin
7745 @item --plugin
7746 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7747
7748 @cindex SPU overlays
7749 @kindex --no-overlays
7750 @item --no-overlays
7751 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7752 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7753 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7754 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7755
7756 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7757 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7758 @item --emit-stub-syms
7759 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7760 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7761
7762 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7763 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7764 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7765 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7766 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7767 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7768
7769 @cindex SPU local store size
7770 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7771 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7772 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7773 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7774 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7775
7776 @cindex SPU
7777 @kindex --stack-analysis
7778 @item --stack-analysis
7779 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7780 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7781 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7782 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7783 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7784 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7785 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7786 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7787 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7788 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7789 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7790 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7791 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7792 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7793 and calls will be given.
7794
7795 @cindex SPU
7796 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7797 @item --emit-stack-syms
7798 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7799 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7800 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7801 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7802 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7803 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7804 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7805 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7806 @end table
7807
7808 @ifclear GENERIC
7809 @lowersections
7810 @end ifclear
7811 @end ifset
7812
7813 @ifset TICOFF
7814 @ifclear GENERIC
7815 @raisesections
7816 @end ifclear
7817
7818 @node TI COFF
7819 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7820 @cindex TI COFF versions
7821 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7822 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7823 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7824 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7825 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7826 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7827
7828 @ifclear GENERIC
7829 @lowersections
7830 @end ifclear
7831 @end ifset
7832
7833 @ifset WIN32
7834 @ifclear GENERIC
7835 @raisesections
7836 @end ifclear
7837
7838 @node WIN32
7839 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7840
7841 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7842 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7843 command-line options mentioned here.
7844
7845 @table @emph
7846 @cindex import libraries
7847 @item import libraries
7848 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7849 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7850 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7851 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7852 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7853 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7854
7855 @item exporting DLL symbols
7856 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7857 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7858
7859 @table @emph
7860 @item using auto-export functionality
7861 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7862 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7863 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7864
7865 @itemize
7866 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7867 @item --exclude-symbols
7868 @item --exclude-libs
7869 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7870 @item --version-script
7871 @end itemize
7872
7873 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7874 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7875 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7876 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7877 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7878 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7879 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7880 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7881
7882 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7883 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7884 if either of the following are true:
7885
7886 @itemize
7887 @item A DEF file is used.
7888 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7889 @end itemize
7890
7891 @item using a DEF file
7892 @cindex using a DEF file
7893 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7894 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7895 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7896 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7897 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7898
7899 @example
7900 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7901 @end example
7902
7903 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7904 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7905
7906 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7907
7908 @example
7909 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7910
7911 EXPORTS
7912 foo
7913 bar
7914 _bar = bar
7915 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7916 var1 DATA
7917 doo = foo == foo2
7918 eoo DATA == var1
7919 @end example
7920
7921 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7922 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7923 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7924 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7925 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7926 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7927 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7928 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7929 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7930
7931 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7932 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7933 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7934
7935 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7936 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7937 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7938 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7939
7940 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7941 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7942 non-default base address for the image.
7943
7944 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7945 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7946 filename specified on the command line.
7947
7948 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7949
7950 @example
7951 EXPORTS
7952 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7953 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7954 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7955 @end example
7956
7957 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7958 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7959 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7960 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7961 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7962 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7963 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7964
7965 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7966
7967 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7968 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7969 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7970 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7971 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7972
7973 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7974 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7975 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7976 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7977
7978 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7979 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7980 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7981 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7982 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7983 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7984 application will behave unexpectedly.
7985
7986 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7987 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7988 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7989 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7990 the DLL without an import library.
7991
7992 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7993 other DEF file statements
7994
7995 @cindex creating a DEF file
7996 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7997 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
7998
7999 @item Using decorations
8000 @cindex Using decorations
8001 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8002 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8003 declared as:
8004
8005 @example
8006 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8007 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8008 @end example
8009
8010 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8011 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8012 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8013 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8014
8015 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8016 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8017 instead:
8018
8019 @example
8020 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8021 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8022 @end example
8023
8024 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8025 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8026 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8027 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8028 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8029 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8030 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8031 information.
8032 @end table
8033
8034 @cindex automatic data imports
8035 @item automatic data imports
8036 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8037 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8038 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8039 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8040 code to these platforms, especially for large
8041 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8042 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8043 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8044 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8045 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8046 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8047 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8048 trigger the feature's use.
8049
8050 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8051 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8052
8053 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8054 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8055
8056 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8057 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8058 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8059 below.
8060
8061 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8062 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8063 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8064 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8065 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8066 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8067 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8068 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8069 references.
8070
8071 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8072 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8073 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8074 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8075 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8076 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8077 run without error on an older system.
8078
8079 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8080 enabled as needed.
8081
8082 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8083 @item direct linking to a dll
8084 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8085 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8086 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8087 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8088 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8089 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8090 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8091 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8092 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8093 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8094
8095 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8096 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8097 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8098 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8099 select the dll instead of an import library.
8100
8101
8102 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8103 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8104
8105 @example
8106 libxxx.dll.a
8107 xxx.dll.a
8108 libxxx.a
8109 xxx.lib
8110 libxxx.lib
8111 cygxxx.dll (*)
8112 libxxx.dll
8113 xxx.dll
8114 @end example
8115
8116 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8117
8118 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8119 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8120 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8121 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8122 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8123
8124 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8125 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8126 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8127 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8128 could coexist on the same machine.
8129
8130 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8131 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8132 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8133
8134 @example
8135 bin/
8136 cygxxx.dll
8137 lib/
8138 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8139 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8140 @end example
8141
8142 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8143 done two ways:
8144
8145 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8146 @example
8147 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8148 @end example
8149
8150 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8151 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8152 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8153 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8154
8155 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8156 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8157 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8158 making the app/dll.
8159
8160 @example
8161 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8162 @end example
8163
8164 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8165
8166 @example
8167 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8168 @end example
8169
8170 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8171 perfectly legal
8172
8173 @example
8174 bin/
8175 cygxxx-5.dll
8176 lib/
8177 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8178 @end example
8179
8180 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8181 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8182 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8183
8184 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8185 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8186
8187 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8188 work with auto-imported data.
8189
8190 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8191 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8192 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8193 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8194 possible to do this without an import lib.
8195
8196 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8197 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8198 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8199 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8200
8201 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8202 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8203 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8204 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8205 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8206 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8207 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8208
8209 @item symbol aliasing
8210 @table @emph
8211 @item adding additional names
8212 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8213 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8214 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8215 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8216 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8217
8218 @example
8219 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8220
8221 EXPORTS
8222 foo
8223 _foo = foo
8224 @end example
8225
8226 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8227
8228 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8229 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8230
8231 @example
8232 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8233 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8234 @end example
8235
8236 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8237 symbols.
8238
8239 @item renaming symbols
8240 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8241 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8242 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8243 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8244 created). In the following example:
8245
8246 @example
8247 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8248
8249 EXPORTS
8250 _foo = foo
8251 @end example
8252
8253 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8254 @samp{_foo}.
8255 @end table
8256
8257 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8258 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8259 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8260 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8261 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8262 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8263 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8264 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8265 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8266 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8267 which is probably not what you wanted.
8268
8269 @cindex weak externals
8270 @item weak externals
8271 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8272 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8273 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8274 are three variants of weak externals:
8275 @itemize
8276 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8277 called lazy externals.
8278 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8279 This form is not presently implemented.
8280 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8281 implemented.
8282 @end itemize
8283 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8284 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8285 uses a default value.
8286
8287 @cindex aligned common symbols
8288 @item aligned common symbols
8289 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8290 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8291 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8292 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8293 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8294 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8295 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8296 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8297
8298 @end table
8299
8300 @ifclear GENERIC
8301 @lowersections
8302 @end ifclear
8303 @end ifset
8304
8305 @ifset XTENSA
8306 @ifclear GENERIC
8307 @raisesections
8308 @end ifclear
8309
8310 @node Xtensa
8311 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8312
8313 @cindex Xtensa processors
8314 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8315 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8316 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8317 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8318 example, with the command:
8319
8320 @smallexample
8321 SECTIONS
8322 @{
8323 .text : @{
8324 *(.literal .text)
8325 @}
8326 @}
8327 @end smallexample
8328
8329 @noindent
8330 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8331 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8332 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8333 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8334 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8335 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8336 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8337
8338 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8339 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8340 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8341 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8342 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8343 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8344 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8345 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8346 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8347 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8348 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8349 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8350
8351 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8352 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8353 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8354 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8355 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8356 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8357 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8358 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8359 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8360 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8361 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8362 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8363 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8364 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8365
8366 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8367 control the linker:
8368
8369 @cindex Xtensa options
8370 @table @option
8371 @item --size-opt
8372 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8373 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8374 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8375 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8376 preserve the correctness of the code.
8377 @end table
8378
8379 @ifclear GENERIC
8380 @lowersections
8381 @end ifclear
8382 @end ifset
8383
8384 @ifclear SingleFormat
8385 @node BFD
8386 @chapter BFD
8387
8388 @cindex back end
8389 @cindex object file management
8390 @cindex object formats available
8391 @kindex objdump -i
8392 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8393 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8394 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8395 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8396 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8397 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8398 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8399 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8400 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8401
8402 @cindex BFD requirements
8403 @cindex requirements for BFD
8404 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8405 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8406 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8407 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8408 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8409 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8410 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8411
8412 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8413 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8414 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8415 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8416
8417 @menu
8418 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8419 @end menu
8420
8421 @node BFD outline
8422 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8423 @cindex opening object files
8424 @include bfdsumm.texi
8425 @end ifclear
8426
8427 @node Reporting Bugs
8428 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8429 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8430 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8431
8432 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8433
8434 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8435 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8436 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8437 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8438 @command{ld}.
8439
8440 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8441 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8442
8443 @menu
8444 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8445 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8446 @end menu
8447
8448 @node Bug Criteria
8449 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8450 @cindex bug criteria
8451
8452 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8453
8454 @itemize @bullet
8455 @cindex fatal signal
8456 @cindex linker crash
8457 @cindex crash of linker
8458 @item
8459 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8460 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8461
8462 @cindex error on valid input
8463 @item
8464 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8465
8466 @cindex invalid input
8467 @item
8468 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8469 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8470 object files are correct.
8471
8472 @item
8473 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8474 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8475 @end itemize
8476
8477 @node Bug Reporting
8478 @section How to Report Bugs
8479 @cindex bug reports
8480 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8481
8482 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8483 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8484 recommend you contact that organization first.
8485
8486 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8487 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8488 distribution.
8489
8490 @ifset BUGURL
8491 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8492 @value{BUGURL}.
8493 @end ifset
8494
8495 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8496 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8497 fact or leave it out, state it!
8498
8499 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8500 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8501 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8502 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8503 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8504 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8505 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8506 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8507 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8508 and the most helpful.
8509
8510 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8511 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8512 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8513
8514 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8515 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8516 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8517 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8518
8519 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8520
8521 @itemize @bullet
8522 @item
8523 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8524 the @samp{--version} argument.
8525
8526 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8527 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8528
8529 @item
8530 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8531 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8532
8533 @item
8534 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8535 version number.
8536
8537 @item
8538 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8539 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8540
8541 @item
8542 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8543 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8544 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8545 sufficient.
8546
8547 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8548 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8549
8550 @item
8551 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8552 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8553 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8554 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8555 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8556 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8557 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8558 attachments are best.
8559
8560 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8561 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8562 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8563 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8564 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8565
8566 @item
8567 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8568 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8569
8570 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8571 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8572 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8573 a chance to make a mistake.
8574
8575 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8576 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8577 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8578 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8579 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8580 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8581 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8582 any conclusion from our observations.
8583
8584 @item
8585 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8586 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8587 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8588 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8589 context, not by line number.
8590
8591 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8592 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8593 @end itemize
8594
8595 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8596
8597 @itemize @bullet
8598 @item
8599 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8600
8601 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8602 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8603 changes will not affect it.
8604
8605 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8606 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8607 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8608 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8609
8610 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8611 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8612 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8613 less time, and so on.
8614
8615 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8616 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8617
8618 @item
8619 A patch for the bug.
8620
8621 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8622 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8623 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8624 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8625
8626 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8627 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8628 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8629 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8630 fixed.
8631
8632 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8633 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8634 help us to understand.
8635
8636 @item
8637 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8638
8639 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8640 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8641 @end itemize
8642
8643 @node MRI
8644 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8645 @cindex MRI compatibility
8646 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8647 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8648 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8649 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8650 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8651 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8652 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8653
8654 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8655 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8656 features to make use of them.
8657
8658 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8659 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8660
8661 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8662 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8663 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8664 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8665 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8666
8667 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8668
8669 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8670 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8671 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8672
8673 @table @code
8674 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8675 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8676 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8677 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8678 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8679 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8680 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8681 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8682 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8683 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8684 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8685
8686 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8687 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8688 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8689 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8690
8691 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8692
8693 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8694 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8695 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8696 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8697
8698 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8699 @item BASE @var{expression}
8700 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8701 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8702
8703 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8704 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8705 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8706 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8707
8708 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8709 @item END
8710 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8711
8712 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8713 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8714 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8715 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8716
8717 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8718 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8719 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8720 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8721
8722 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8723 same line, with no change in its effect.
8724
8725 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8726 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8727 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8728 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8729 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8730 command line.
8731
8732 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8733 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8734 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8735 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8736 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8737
8738 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8739 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8740 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8741 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8742 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8743 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8744 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8745 file, in the order specified.
8746
8747 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8748 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8749 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8750 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8751 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8752 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8753
8754 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8755 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8756 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8757 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8758 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8759 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8760 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8761 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8762 @end table
8763
8764 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8765 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8766 @include fdl.texi
8767
8768 @node LD Index
8769 @unnumbered LD Index
8770
8771 @printindex cp
8772
8773 @tex
8774 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8775 % meantime:
8776 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8777 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8778 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8779 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8780 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8781 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8782 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8783 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8784 \page\colophon
8785 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8786 @end tex
8787
8788 @bye
This page took 0.200356 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.